Home

Garmin 360 GPS Receiver User Manual

1. Figure 6 49 KPMD Approach This example uses the VOR DME RWY 25 approach into Palmdale California KPMD and includes a teardrop course reversal refer to Figure 6 49 for the following steps 1 At the initial approach fix PMD a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 070 appears along the bottom of the screen As the distance to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 070 Figure 6 50 Dial the outbound course into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 21 Figure 6 50 Waypoint Alert Default NAV Page 2 Fly the course from fix to distance leg as shown on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Default NAV Page Note the magenta line in Figure 6 51 which represents the currently active leg of the approach The distance DIS displayed on the above screens is TO the D13 0 point The flight plan automatically sequences to the next leg upon reaching D13 0 3 At 13 0 nm from the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 265 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 51 Turn to intercept the final approach course and watch for the CDI needle to begin to center Figure 6 51 Waypoint Alert Map Page 4 When approaching the intermediate fix CF25 a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 265 appears 5 Within 2 0 nm of the FAF THERO the GNS 530
2. B 1 Appendix C Troubleshooting Q amp A C 1 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H v WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES WARNING Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the TAWS function The TAWS feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight The TAWS feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain aware ness system Terrain data is obtained from third party sources Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data WARNING The terrain data should be used only as an aid for situational awareness Terrain data must not be used as the sole basis for decisions or maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles Terrain data must not be used for navigation WARNING The altitude calculated by GNS 530 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in aircraft GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation Always use pressure altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in the aircraft WARNING The Jeppesen database used in the GNS 530 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that its information r
3. 1 1 1 2 Key and Knob Functions 1 2 1 3 Takeoff Tour 1 5 SECTION 2 COM 2 1 2 1 Communicating using the GNS 530 2 1 SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 3 1 Main Page Groups 3 1 3 2 NAV Page Group 3 2 3 3 Default NAV Page 3 2 3 4 Map Page 3 6 3 5 TERRAIN Page 3 15 3 6 TAWS Page 3 18 3 7 NAV COM Page 3 21 3 8 Satellite Status Page 3 23 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION 4 1 4 1 Overview 4 1 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 5 1 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Page 5 1 5 2 Active Flight Plan Page 5 8 SECTION 6 PROCEDURES
4. 8 5 8 4 Nearest NDB Page 8 6 8 5 Nearest VOR Page 8 6 8 6 Nearest User Waypoint Page 8 8 8 7 Nearest Center ARTCC Page 8 8 8 8 Nearest Flight Service Station FSS Page 8 9 8 9 Nearest Airspace Page 8 11 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 9 1 9 1 VLOC VOR LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE Receiver Operations 9 1 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 1 10 1 AUX Page Group 10 1 10 2 Flight Planning Page 10 2 10 3 Utility Page 10 10 10 4 Setup Page 10 18 SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION VNAV 11 1 SECTION 12 TERRAIN 12 1 12 1 INTRODUCTION 12 1 12 2 TERRAIN Page 12 3 12 3 TERRAIN Alerts 12 4 12 4 Database Information for TERRAIN 12 9 SECTION
5. 6 1 6 1 Approaches Departures and Arrivals 6 1 6 2 Non Precision Approach Operations 6 3 6 3 ILS Approaches 6 25 6 4 Points to Remember for All Approaches 6 32 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 1 7 1 WPT Page Group 7 1 7 2 Airport Location Page 7 4 7 3 Airport Runway Page 7 6 7 4 Airport Frequency Page 7 8 7 5 Airport Approach Page 7 10 7 6 Airport Arrival Page 7 12 7 7 Airport Departure Page 7 14 7 8 Intersection Page 7 16 7 9 NDB Page 7 16 7 10 VOR Page 7 17 7 11 User Waypoint Page 7 18 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 1 8 1 NRST Page Group 8 1 8 2 Nearest Airport Page 8 3 8 3 Nearest Intersection Page
6. 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off as desired Figure 10 31 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Figure 10 31 Restricted Alarm Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 22 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 To change the altitude buffer turn the large right knob to highlight the Altitude Buffers field Figure 10 32 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired buffer distance Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 32 Buffer Distance Field Selected NOTE When an approach has been loaded into the active flight plan airspace alert messages are disabled within 30nm of the destination airport Setup Page CDI Scale Alarms Changing the maximum CDI scale 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the Selected CDI field Figure 10 33 Turn the small right knob to select the desired CDI scale The selected scale and any lower scale settings are used during the various phases of flight as described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 33 Selected CDI Field Highlighted 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected scale The System CDI field displays the CDI scale currently in use The System CDI setting may differ from the Selected CDI depending upon the current phase of flight as described previously in this s
7. GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 16 Refer to Figure 6 38 for the following steps Figure 6 38 Approach Mode DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION 9 When approaching the FAF NEXT DTK 214 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 39 Select this course on the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob Figure 6 39 Final Approach Fix 10 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW22 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP 11 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 40 Figure 6 40 Waypoint Alert 12 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined in Flying the Missed Approach in this
8. 3 The To From indicator on the HSI or CDI flips momentarily to indicate that the aircraft has crossed the midpoint of the turn For more information on waypoint alerts and turn advisories see Sections 6 2 and 6 3 When does the CDI scale change and what does it change to The GNS 530 begins a smooth CDI scale transition from the 5 0 nm enroute oceanic mode to the 1 0 nm terminal mode scale 30 nm from the destination airport Figure C 7 The CDI scale further transitions to 0 3 nm approach mode at 2 nm prior to the FAF during an active approach If the pilot is in a missed approach situation and would like to return the CDI to the 1 nm scale activate the missed approach sequence by pressing the OBS Key as described in Section 6 2 Flying the Missed Approach The CDI scale is also 1 0 nm terminal mode within 30 nm of the departure airport 0 3 nm 30 nm 2nm FAF MAP 1 nm 1 nm 5 nm 1 minute Approach Enroute Oceanic Terminal Figure C 7 CDI Scale Transition GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C MAP DATUMS C 6 Why does my CDI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active Unlike a VOR the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the cross track distance to the desired course not an angular relationship to the destination Figure C 8 Therefore the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of the distance to the destination and
9. Figure 5 13 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 13 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 6 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Catalog Options The following options some covered on the preceding pages are available for the Flight Plan Catalog Page Activate Flight Plan Allows the pilot to select the flight plan for navigation guidance as described previously in this section Invert amp Activate FPL Allows the pilot to reverse the highlighted flight plan and select it for navigation guidance as described previously in this section Create New Flight Plan Allows the pilot to create a new flight plan as described previously in this section Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer a Direct to destination the active flight plan any stored flight plan or user waypoints to a second 400 Series or 500 Series Garmin unit Some crossfill operations can be done automatically If both units are set to auto a change in the direct to destination or active flight plan on one unit is seen on the other For additional information see Section 10 2 Flight Planning Page Crossfill Crossfilling flight plans between two 400 or 500 Series Garmin units 1 Select the Crossfill option from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu
10. G using my GPS Yes the pilot may file a flight plan as G if the GNS 530 is a certified A1 or A2 installation If flying enroute the pilot may file G with an expired database only after having verified all route waypoints Non precision approaches may not be flown with an expired database See an approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for more information What does the OBS key do and when do I use it The OBS Key is used to select manual OBS mode or automatic sequencing of waypoints Activating OBS mode as indicated by an OBS annunciation directly above the OBS Key holds the current active to waypoint as the navigation reference and prevents the GPS from sequencing to the next waypoint When OBS mode is cancelled automatic waypoint sequencing is selected and the GNS 530 automatically selects the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active to waypoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C MAP DATUMS C 3 NORMAL no OBS annunciator OBS Automatic sequencing of waypoints Manual sequencing holds on selected waypoint Change in HSI does not affect CDI deflection Manually select course to next waypoint from HSI Always navigates TO the active waypoint Indicates TO or FROM waypoint Must be in this mode for final approach course Cannot be set for final approach course or publ
11. M Degrees Magnetic m Meters mb Millibars of Pressure Med Medium MHz Megahertz mi Statute Miles MOA Military Operations Area mph Statute Miles Per Hour mpm Meters Per Minute mps Meters Per Second MSA Minimum Safe Altitude MSG Message MSL Mean Sea Level mul Multicom NATNL National NAV Navigation NAVAID Navigational Aid NDB Non Directional Radio Beacon nm Nautical Miles NRST Nearest NUM Number OBS Omnibearing Selector GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 11 OCN Oceanic P POS Present Position PROC Procedure s PROV Province PWR Power RAD Radial RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring REF Reference REQ Required Requirements RESTRICTD Restricted RNG Range RX Receive SID Standard Instrument Departure Sml Small SPD Speed SQ Squelch SRFC Surface STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route SUA Special Use Airspace T Degree True TACAN Tactical Air Navigation TAS True Airspeed TAT Total Air Temperature TEMP Temperature TERM Terminal TKE Track Angle Error TMA ICAO Terminal Control Area TRANS Transition TRFC Traffic TRK Track also Ground Track TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area twr Tower TX Transmit uni Unicom UTC Coordinated Universal Time also GMT or zulu
12. NavData Card Slot left hand slot NOTE There are two data card slots on the face of the GNS 530 Figure A 1 The Jeppesen NavData card should be inserted in the left hand slot The right hand slot is provided for the Terrain Data Card To insert the NavData or Terrain Data card Figure A 2 1 Place the card into the appropriate card slot with the label facing up and the swing arm handle on the left 2 Press the data card into place until it seats on the internal connector and the front of the card is flush with the face of the GNS 530 unit 3 If the swing arm handle is extended gently lower the handle and push it into place flush with the face of the GNS 530 unit Figure A 2 Data Card Insertion Removal Detail GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE A 2 To remove the NavData or Terrain data card Figure A 2 1 Gently press on the tab using a slight rightward motion at the front center of the data card This partially deploys the swing arm handle Press here to deploy handle Figure A 3 Swing Arm Handle Operation 2 Rotate the swing arm handle outward until it locks into place perpendicular to the face of the GNS 530 unit 3 Grasp the top and bottom surfaces of the swing arm handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull directly away from the face of the GNS 530 unit to remove the data card GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Ref
13. SECTION 2 COM Stuck Microphone As mentioned previously in this section when the GNS 530 is transmitting a TX indication appears in the COM Window If the microphone key is stuck or accidentally left in the on position or the microphone continues to transmit after the key is released the COM transmitter automatically times out ceases transmitting after 35 seconds of continuous broadcasting A COM push to talk key stuck message Figure 2 11 is displayed as long as the condition continues Figure 2 11 Message Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 1 MAIN PAGE GROUPS The GNS 530 s main pages are divided into four separate page groups NAV WPT AUX and NRST Table 3 1 Each page group is comprised of multiple pages The page groups are selected using the large right knob The individual pages are selected using the small right knob Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group 5 NAV Pages see Section 7 see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 3 1 Page Groups The bottom right corner of the screen Figure 3 1 indicates which page group is currently being displayed e g NAV WPT AUX or NRST the number of screens available within that group indicated by the square icons and the placement of the current screen within that group indicated by a highlighted square icon Figure 3 1 Current Page a
14. VAR Variation VER Version VFR Visual Flight Rules VLOC VOR Localizer Receiver VNAV Vertical Navigation VOL Volume VOR VHF Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range VS Vertical Speed VSR Vertical Speed Required WPT Waypoint WX Weather XTK Crosstrack Error GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 12 16 3 NAVIGATION TERMS The following navigation terms are used on the GNS 530 and in this Pilot s Guide Refer to Figures 15 1 and 15 2 for graphic representation of navigation terms WPT 1 XTK NORTH WPT 2 BRG GS DIS AIRPLANE DTK TRK Figure 15 1 Illustrated NAV Terms VERTICAL NAVIGATION PROFILE VERTICAL SPEED REQUIRED DISTANCE TO TARGET TIME AND DISTANCE TO PROFILE TARGET ALTITUDE AND POSITION AIRPORT CURRENT ALTITUDE AND POSITION Vertical Navigation Figure 15 2 Illustrated Vertical NAV Terms ALT altitude Height above mean sea level MSL BRG bearing The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint CAS calibrated airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for instrument errors CTS course to steer The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce course error or stay on course Provides the most efficient heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along the flight plan CUM cumulative
15. VLOC RECEIVER SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 9 1 VLOC VOR LOCALIZER GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER OPERATIONS The GNS 530 includes digitally tuned VOR localizer and glideslope receivers with the desired frequency selected in the VLOC Window along the left hand side of the display Figure 9 1 Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small left knob and turning the small and large left knobs to select the desired frequency Figure 9 1 VLOC Window Ident Audio and Volume VLOC ident is enabled by pressing the VLOC Volume Knob When VLOC ident is enabled an ID indication appears in the upper right corner of the VLOC Window to the immediate right of VLOC Figure 9 1 VLOC audio volume is adjusted using the VLOC Volume Knob Turn the VLOC Volume Knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease volume VLOC Window and Tuning VLOC frequencies are tuned with the large and small left knobs when the tuning cursor is in the standby VLOC frequency field The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency The active frequency is the frequency currently in use The tuning cursor remains in the COM Window To select a VOR Localizer ILS frequency press the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in the VLOC Window NOTE The tuning cursor normally appears in the COM Window unless placed in the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob When the tuning cursor is in the VL
16. remove waypoint confirmation window Figure 5 8 Figure 5 8 Remove Waypoint Window 5 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the waypoint 6 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page A one line user comment may be added to any flight plan which is displayed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page next to the flight plan s number By default as the flight plan is being created the comment shows the first and last waypoints in the flight plan Changing the comment line for an existing flight plan 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to select the comment line at the top of the screen 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the new comment Figure 5 9 Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 5 9 Comment Line Selected 5 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 4 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Activating Flight Plans Once a flight plan is defined through the Flight Plan Catalog Page using the steps outlined previously in this section it may be activated for navigation Activating the flight plan places it into flight pl
17. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 DON T SINK DON T SINK 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 Height Above Terrain Feet Sink Rate Feet Per Minute 0 DON T SINK DON T SINK 500 1000 1500 2500 3500 2000 3000 4000 Figure 13 9 Negative Climb Rate NCR Alert Criteria GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 10 SECTION 13 TAWS FIVE HUNDRED AURAL ALERT The purpose of the aural alert message Five Hundred is to provide an advisory alert to the pilot that the air craft is 500 feet above terrain When the aircraft descends within 500 feet of terrain the aural message Five Hun dred is generated There are no display annunciations or pop up alerts that accompany the aural message TAWS NOT AVAILABLE ALERT TAWS requires a 3 D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area the annunciation TER N A is generated in the annunciation window and TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE is generated on the TAWS Page Figure 13 10 The aural message TERRAIN Not Available is generated When the GPS signal is re established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area the TER N A visual annunciation is removed there is no associated aural message Figure 13 10 TAWS NOT
18. 8 Excluded Satellite 9 Current Time 10 Present Position 11 Current Page Group 12 Number of Pages in Current Page Group 13 Position of Current Page within Current Page Group 14 GPS calculated Altitude GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 24 The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix using Estimated Position Error EPE Dilution of Precision DOP and Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL figures DOP measures satellite geometry quality i e number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other on a scale from one to ten The lowest numbers are the best accuracy and the highest numbers are the worst EPE uses DOP and other factors to calculate a horizontal position error in feet or meters HUL is explained in Section 15 GPS Receiver Status Messages Searching Sky The GPS receiver is searching the sky for ANY visible satellites The pilot is informed of this status with a Searching the Sky message Acquiring Sat The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation In this mode the receiver uses satellite orbital data collected continuously from the satellites and last known position to determine which satellites should be in view 2D Navigation The GPS receiver is in 2D navigation mode Altitude data is provided by an altitude serializer 3D Navigation The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and
19. Height Above Terrain Feet Distance From Destination Airport nm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Too Low Terrain Too Low Terrain Runway Threshold Figure 13 5 PDA Alerting Threshold TAWS Inhibit TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Only the FLTA and PDA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode Inhibiting TAWS 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figure 13 6 Figure 13 6 TAWS Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the TAWS annunciator field when TAWS is inhibited Figure 13 7 Annunciator Field Figure 13 7 Annunciator Field Enabling TAWS 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TAWS system is functional again GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 8 SECTION 13 TAWS Excessive Descent Rate Alert The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate EDR alert is to provide suitable notification when the aircraft is deter mined to be closing descending upon terrain at an excessive speed Figure 13 8 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO C151b 6000 5500 5000 4500 4000 3500 30
20. The GPS calculated course is projected to enter a special use airspace within 10 minutes This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Airspace near and ahead The GPS calculated position is within 2 nm of the boundary of a special use airspace and the course is projected to enter the airspace within 10 minutes This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded All data referenced to True North The GNS 530 has not detected a NavData card in the left data card slot Altitude input failure The GNS 530 is configured to receive altitude serializer data Icarus Rosetta or Shadin and it is not being received Or the data was being received but has been interrupted If a grey code altitude input is available it is used instead If the problem persists contact a Garmin dealer and check the installation and installation settings When this message occurs no pilot action is required if enough satellites are available for a 3D position fix provided no RAIM warnings are present However if only a 2D position fix is possible the pilot should maintain the GPS altitude within 1 000 feet of pressure altitude by entering the altitude on the Position Page Approach is not active The approach could not transition to active at 2 nm or closer to the FAF Verify that SUSP DOES NOT appear directly above the OBS Key
21. The total of all legs in a flight plan such as cumulative distance DIS distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint DOP dilution of precision A measure of satellite geometry quality on a scale of one to ten lowest numbers are best highest numbers are worst DTK desired track The desired course between the active from and to waypoints EFF efficiency A measure of fuel consumption expressed in distance per fuel units e g nautical miles per gallon ENDUR endurance Flight endurance or total available flight time based upon available fuel EPE estimated position error A measure of satellite geometry quality and additional factors expressed as a horizontal position error in feet or meters ESA enroute safe altitude The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct to GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 13 ETA estimated time of arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft will reach the destination waypoint based upon current speed and track ETE estimated time enroute The time it will take to reach the destination waypoint from present position based upon current ground speed FF fuel flow The fuel flow rate expressed in fuel units pe
22. Turn the small right knob to display a list of data options Figure 1 20 Figure 1 20 Select Field Type Window 4 Press the ENT Key to select the desired data item and return to the Default NAV Page NAV COM Page From the Default NAV Page turn the small right knob until the NAV COM Page Figure 1 21 is displayed Figure 1 21 NAV COM Page Frequency Type Departure Enroute or Arrival Airport Frequency List The NAV COM Page displays the available frequencies communications and navigation for the departure airport any enroute airports which are included in the flight plan and the final destination airport When using the direct to function frequencies are listed for the airport nearest to the starting position and the destination airport Displaying the frequency list for the desired flight plan or direct to airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor on the airport identifier field in the GPS Window 2 Turn the small right knob to display the list of airports departure arrival and enroute for the flight plan or direct to Continue to turn the small right knob until the desired airport is selected 3 Press the ENT Key to display the frequency list for the selected airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 14 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION A frequency listed on the NAV COM Page can be quickly transferred to the standby field of the C
23. Wind is gusting 11 kts or more above its sustained speed Table 14 17 Gust Offset Graphics To interpret wind speed add the values of each of the wind speed barbs In Figure 14 48 there are two long barbs 10 knots each and one short barb 5 knots each Thus the total wind speed is 25 knots Adding the gust offset to this figure gives winds gusting to 36 knots Thus the symbol in Figure 14 48 indicates the surface wind at KFRM is coming from a direction of 300 at a speed of 25 knots gusting to 36 knots or greater The data age is 11 20 minutes old Gust Offset Wind Speed Wind Vector Data Age Figure 14 48 Wind Symbol GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 38 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Temperature Dewpoints The Temperature Dewpoint Range symbols Table 14 18 display the difference between the reported temperature and dewpoint Differences are shown in degrees Fahrenheit Temp Dewpoint Display Ranges Blank Unknown 11 Green 7 10 Green 0 6 Yellow Table 14 18 Temp Dewpoint Ranges This symbol in Figure 14 49 displays the difference between the reported temperature and dewpoint as 7 10 degrees Fahrenheit at KSPW Figure 14 49 Temp Dewpoint Symbol Temperature Dewpoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 15 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION 15 1 SECTION 15 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUS
24. 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the reference waypoint The reference waypoint can be an airport VOR NDB intersection or another user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected identifier 5 The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Figure 7 40 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the radial from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected radial Figure 7 40 Radial Field Selected GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 20 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 6 The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the distance from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected distance 7 Turn the large right knob to highlight Create and press the ENT Key 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE The GNS 530 allows the pilot to create a new user waypoint at a defined radial and distance from the present position To reference the present position follow the preceding steps but press the CLR Key in Step 4 P POS appears in the reference waypoint REF WPT field to indicate that radial and distance information references the present position The second reference waypoint field REF WPT is a temporary reference only not a reference that is stored with the user waypoint By default this
25. H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 7 4 Fly the outbound course 5 Approximately one minute after passing the FAF LYH the alert message START PROC TRN appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 16 Initiate the procedure turn at any time after receiving this alert message Figure 6 16 Waypoint Alert Figure 6 17 Terminal Mode 4 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 17 for the following steps 6 Course guidance is provided relative to the outbound leg from the FAF No guidance through the procedure turn itself is given The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page The CDI needle starts moving to the right 7 When turning to intercept the inbound course the GNS 530 sequences to the inbound leg to the FAF the CDI needle swings to the opposite side to provide proper sensing along the final course segment and NEXT DTK 025 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 18 Figure 6 18 Sequence to Inbound Leg 8 Turn to the final approach course 9 Within 2 0 nm of the FAF LYH the GNS 530 switches from terminal mode to approach mode Figure 6 19 CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 19 Approach Annunciator GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 8 10
26. Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Display Range Black Terrain No Danger Terrain More than 1000 below Aircraft Altitude Yellow Terrain Caution Terrain Between 100 and 1000 Below Aircraft Altitude GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 16 Displaying a 120 view 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select View 120 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 TERRAIN Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key To switch back to a 360 view repeat step 1 select View 360 and press the ENT Key NOTE The TERRAIN Page gives a Track Up display orientation as indicated by the TRK label shown on the display This is the only orientation available on this page Seven display ranges are available allowing for a more complete view of the surrounding area Changing the display range Select the TERRAIN Page and press up or down on the RNG Key to select the desired range 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50 nm 100 nm Figure 3 29 Display Range Field Figure 3 29 TERRAIN Display Range Aviation information such as airports VORs and other NAVAIDs can be turned on or off from the TERRAIN Page Showing or hiding aviation data 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select Show or Hide Aviation Data Figure 3 30
27. Press the CLR Key to delete the message text followed by the ENT Key to confirm the deletion Flight Planning Page Crossfill Select Crossfill from the Flight Planning Page the Default NAV Page or Active Flight Plan Page by pressing the MENU Key and then scrolling down to Crossfill and pressing the ENT key The crossfill method options are Auto or Manual Automatic Operation If both units are set to automatic a change in the active flight plan of one unit is also be seen in the other Initiating a direct to to a waypoint on one unit also initiates a direct to to the same waypoint on the other unit If one unit is set for automatic crossfill and the other is set for manual crossfill then only the auto unit automatically sends data to the manual unit In this configuration the auto unit could be thought of as the master unit Manual Operation If manual operation is desired the pilot must invoke all transfers from that unit When a unit is configured for automatic transfer a manual transfer can also be done on command If either of the messages data transfer error or data transfer cancelled are received during an automatic or manual transfer the pilot must force another transfer GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 9 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Transferring flight plans or user waypoints to from a second 400 500 series unit 1 Select Crossfill f
28. Pwr on or GS gt 30kt Figure 10 22 Total Trip Reset Mode Window 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired reset mode Pwr on records trip time in hours minutes seconds any time the GNS 530 is turned on GS gt 30kt records trip time any time the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots 4 Press the ENT Key when finished 5 To reset the total trip time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 16 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Utility Page Trip Statistics Resetting trip statistics readouts 1 Select Trip Statistics from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Trip Statistics Page Menu with several reset options Figure 10 23 Reset Trip Resets trip odometer and average ground speed readouts Reset Max Speed Resets maximum speed readout only Reset Odometer Resets odometer readout only Reset All Resets all trip statistics readouts Figure 10 23 Trip Statistics Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to select the desired reset option and press the ENT Key Utility Page RAIM Prediction Predicting RAIM availability 1 Select RAIM Prediction from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highli
29. Table 13 1 are used to represent obstacles and potential impact points on the TAWS Page TAWS uses yellow caution and red warning to depict terrain information relative to aircraft altitude Each color is associated with an alert severity level Terrain graphics and visual annunciations also use these color assignments Potential Impact Point Unlighted Obstacle Projected Flight Path 1000 ft 100 ft Threshold Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Yellow Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude Red Figure 13 1 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation for TAWS Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Potential Impact Points Obstacle Location Alert Level lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL Obstacle Symbol Obstacle above or within 100 below current aircraft altitude WARNING Red Obstacle between 100 and 1000 below current aircraft altitude CAUTION Yellow Table 13 1 TAWS Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 4 SECTION 13 TAWS 13 3 TAWS ALERTS TAWS Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters
30. The receiver is looking for the satellites indicated Hollow signal strength bars The receiver has found the satellite s and is collecting data Solid signal strength bars The receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite s is ready for use Checkered signal strength bars Excluded satellites The sky view display at top left corner of the page shows which satellites are currently in view and where they are The outer circle of the sky view represents the horizon with north at top of the page the inner circle 45 above the horizon and the center point directly over head Each satellite has a 30 second data transmission that must be collected hollow signal strength bar before the satellite may be used for navigation solid signal strength bar Once the GPS receiver has determined the present position the GNS 530 indicates position track and ground speed on the other navigation pages The GPS receiver status field also displays the messages listed in Table 3 4 under the appropriate conditions Figure 3 47 Satellite Status Page 5 1 2 3 11 4 13 6 8 7 12 9 14 10 1 Sky View 2 GPS Receiver Status 3 Estimated Position Error EPE Dilution of Precision DOP and Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL 4 Signal Strength Bars 5 Satellite ID Numbers 6 INTEG Annunciator flagged when position not valid 7 Hollow Signal Strength Bar
31. detail The CLR Key allows the pilot to quickly declutter the Map Display providing four levels of map detail Note the 1 2 and 3 are also provided suffix designation in Figure 3 11 indicating each successive declutter level Map Detail Level Figure 3 11 Detail Level on Map Page Five user selectable data fields can be added to the right hand side of the Map Display By default the displayed data is destination waypoint name WPT desired track DTK ground track TRK distance to destination waypoint DIS and ground speed GS Adding these data fields or changing the data types is outlined in Section 3 4 The five data fields can also be removed from the map to show a larger map image as shown in Figure 3 9 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 8 Map Panning Another Map Page function is panning which allows the map to move beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range When the panning function is selected by pressing the small right knob a target pointer flashes on the Map Display Figure 3 12 A window also appears at the top of the Map Display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from the present position Pointer Position Window Target Pointer Figure 3 12 Panning on Map Page Selecting the panning function and panning the Map Display 1 Press
32. large right knobs to enter the temperature Figure 10 10 Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 10 TAT Selected 6 The flashing cursor moves to the aircraft heading HDG field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the aircraft heading from the directional gyro or compass Press the ENT Key when finished 7 With all variables entered the following information is provided DEN ALT Density altitude TAS True airspeed WIND Wind direction and speed HEAD TAIL WIND Magnitude of head wind or tail wind component NOTE If the installation includes components such as an airdata sensor to provide any of the variables above the Density Alt TAS Winds Page data defaults to the values provided by these components Flight Planning Page Scheduler Entering a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field If necessary turn the large right knob to highlight the first blank message field 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the message text Press the ENT Key when finished The GNS 530 stores up to nine scheduled messages holding 20 characters each 4 The flashing cursor moves to the type field under the new message Turn the small right knob to display a window of available options Figure 10 11 Event One Time Periodic Press the
33. or erased Copying a flight plan to another flight plan catalog location 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan to be copied then press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Copy Flight Plan Figure 5 12 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 12 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 4 By default the next empty catalog location is offered To select a different location turn the large right knob to select the flight plan number use the small and large right knobs to enter a different number and press the ENT Key 5 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan Deleting Flight Plans When finished with a flight plan it can easily be deleted from the Flight Plan Catalog Page or the Active Flight Plan Page Deleting a flight plan 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan to be deleted then press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Delete Flight Plan
34. plan pages allow the pilot to create edit and copy flight plans Indicates Current Page Figure 5 1 Active Flight Plan Page Indicates Current Page Figure 5 2 Flight Plan Catalog Page 5 1 FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE The Flight Plan Catalog Page allows the pilot to create edit activate delete and copy flight plans Flight plans numbered from 1 through 19 are used to save flight plans for future use Flight plan 00 is reserved exclusively for the flight plan currently in use for navigation When a flight plan is activated a copy of the flight plan is automatically transferred to flight plan 00 and overwrites any previously active flight plan Creating a new flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Figure 5 2 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Create New Flight Plan and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 2 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 4 A blank Flight Plan Page appears for the first empty storage location Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the departure waypoint and press the ENT Key 5 Repeat step 4 to enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint Figure 5 4 Figure 5 4 Flight Plan Page 6 Once al
35. seconds after landing which is determined by ground speed or by a transition of the aircraft squat switch if connected This delay allows the GTS 8XX to remain out of standby during a touch and go maneuver Traffic Page Traffic can be displayed both on the Map Page only if heading is available and on the Traffic Page Figure 14 22 The orientation source shown at the top of the display first uses heading HDG then GPS Track TRK if no heading is available to orient the display If the GTS 8XX does not have bearing information for an active TA TA followed by range relative altitude and altitude trend is displayed in the lower right corner The Traffic Banner is displayed if more than one TA with no bearing info is active while the TA of most immediate threat is displayed in text below the banner Figure 14 22 Traffic Page Orientation Source Traffic Advisory with no bearing information Display Range Operating Mode Traffic Traffic Banner Traffic Page Display Range The display range on the Traffic Page can be changed at any time Changing the display range on the Traffic Page Press the RNG Key to step through the following range options 2 nm 2 and 6 nm 6 and 12 nm 12 and 24 nm GTS 820 850 only 24 and 40 nm GTS 820 850 only GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 16 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Altitude Displa
36. step 4 below automatic selection of VLOC does not occur refer to Figure 6 65 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 65 Terminal Mode 1 Within 30 nm of KFLG the GNS 530 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 2 If the approach has not yet been activated in steps on the preceding page do so when cleared for the approach 3 When approaching the IAF SHUTR a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 030 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 66 Figure 6 66 Waypoint Alert 4 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the ILS frequency If this step is forgotten the GNS 530 displays a reminder message within 3 nm of the FAF to activate the ILS frequency 5 As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 030 6 Fly the outbound course 7 Approximately one minute past SHUTR intersection the alert message START PROC TRN Figure 6 67 appears along the bottom of the screen if the pilot has not yet begun the procedure turn GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 29 Figure 6 67 Alert Message Figure 6 68 ILS Approach Course DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 68 for the following steps 8 Initiate the
37. when applicable Frequency Type Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group NOTE The order of the pages in the NAV Page Group change when the GNS 530 installation includes connection to traffic and or weather information sources See the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Document 190 00140 10 or Section 14 of this manual for more information Selecting a frequency list for a departure enroute or arrival airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field top line on the NAV COM Page see Figure 3 42 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired airport Figure 3 43 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 43 Airport Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 22 Scrolling through the list of frequencies 1 Activate the cursor if not already active by pressing the small right knob 2 Turn the large right knob to move the cursor through the list of frequencies If there are more frequencies in the list that can be displayed on the screen a scroll bar along the right hand side of the screen Figure 3 44 indicates which part of the list is currently being displayed Figure 3 44 Scroll Bar Scroll Bar 3 To place a frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Wind
38. 10 24 10 26 Shortcuts 4 4 5 14 SIDs 1 15 15 2 Signal strength 1 8 3 23 Sky view 3 23 Small left knob 1 3 Small right knob 1 3 Software database version 10 10 Sort list 5 7 10 14 Specifications vi B 1 Squelch 2 1 16 11 Standby Frequency 1 9 2 2 8 9 8 10 STARs 1 15 15 2 Stuck Microphone 2 5 SUSP 6 8 6 11 6 13 6 16 6 20 6 24 6 31 6 32 16 1 C 3 C 4 Symbols 3 3 3 6 3 17 3 20 7 16 7 17 T Target pointer 3 8 3 9 7 20 TAS Traffic Advisory Systems 14 12 TAWS 12 6 13 5 TAWS Page 3 15 3 18 TCAS 14 1 14 12 Temp Dew Point Ranges 14 38 TERMS 16 1 TERRAIN 1 10 3 15 3 20 12 1 12 5 12 7 13 1 13 3 13 7 TERRAIN Page 1 10 3 15 3 19 12 7 13 3 13 7 Terrain separation v Thumbnail Traffic 14 9 Timers 10 10 10 11 10 14 TIS 14 1 Track TRK 1 6 1 11 1 12 3 4 3 7 3 11 3 12 3 14 3 23 5 8 6 15 6 23 6 24 6 29 6 32 10 3 10 6 10 20 16 7 16 12 16 13 C 6 Traffic Advisory 14 4 Traffic coasting 14 7 Traffic Ground Track 14 5 Traffic Page 14 5 Traffic Warning Window 14 7 Transitions 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 5 6 10 6 17 7 10 7 15 9 3 16 3 C 5 Trip planning 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 5 Trip statistics 10 10 10 16 Tuning cursor 1 3 1 9 2 1 2 2 9 1 Turn advisories C 5 Turn anticipation 16 7 C 5 U Units of measure 1 5 10 18 10 20 10 23 10 24 User Waypoint List 7 22 7 23 7 25 User Waypoint Page 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 8 8 Utility Page 10 10 10 14 10 1
39. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Too Low Terrain Too Low Terrain Runway Threshold Figure 12 5 PDA Alerting Threshold TERRAIN Inhibit TERRAIN also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TERRAIN and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Inhibiting TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figure 12 6 Figure 12 6 TERRAIN Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the TERRAIN annunciator field when TERRAIN is inhibited Figure 12 7 Annunciator Field Figure 12 7 Annunciator Field Enabling TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TERRAIN system is functional again GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 8 SECTION 12 TERRAIN TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ALERT TERRAIN requires a 3 D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area the annunciation TER N A is generated in the annunciation window and TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE is generated on the TERRAIN Page Figure 12 8 When the GPS signal is re established and the aircraft is within the database
40. 6 A 1 Database subscriptions 1 6 Data fields 1 12 1 13 3 5 3 7 3 13 3 14 5 10 10 5 Data Link Request Log Page 14 27 Data Link Status Page 14 33 Date and time 10 3 10 8 10 17 10 20 C 1 Declutter 1 11 3 7 Default NAV page 1 10 Delete user waypoints 16 2 Deleting Flight Plans 5 5 Density altitude 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 6 Departures 1 4 1 15 5 9 5 12 5 14 6 1 6 24 7 1 7 14 7 15 9 3 16 3 Departure time 10 6 10 11 10 15 Desired track 1 11 1 12 3 4 3 7 5 8 6 15 6 23 6 24 10 3 16 7 16 12 16 13 Direct to Key 1 3 Direct To Navigation 4 6 Display backlighting 16 2 16 3 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 2 INDEX Display contrast 10 20 DIS distance 1 11 1 12 3 4 3 7 5 8 5 10 6 6 6 15 6 21 6 22 6 28 7 16 7 18 7 20 7 21 7 22 10 3 10 6 10 24 16 9 16 12 DME Arc 3 3 6 13 DOP 3 23 3 24 15 1 16 3 16 9 16 12 Duplex operations 8 9 Duplicate waypoints 7 4 E Emergency channel select 2 5 ENT Key 1 3 EPE 3 23 3 24 15 1 16 9 16 12 ETA estimated time of arrival 3 4 5 10 10 3 10 6 16 9 16 13 ETE estimated time enroute 1 12 3 4 5 10 10 3 10 6 16 9 16 13 F FDE 1 8 15 1 15 2 16 9 Field Elevation 1 3 1 8 7 4 Flight phases 10 11 10 17 15 1 Flight Planning Page 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 5 10 6 10 8 11 1 11 4 Flight plans 1 4 1 5 1 19 4 3 5 1 5 6 5 7 10 2 10 3 10 9 16 3 16 5 16 7 C 2 Flight plan
41. 6 Airport Type 7 5 7 7 7 10 7 12 7 14 Airspace alert messages 1 18 8 14 10 22 Airspace information 1 18 Altitude 3 24 16 1 16 9 Altitude buffer 8 14 10 20 10 21 10 22 Annunciator 1 8 1 18 3 17 3 19 8 11 12 7 13 7 16 1 C 1 C 3 Approach best available 7 5 Approach procedures 6 1 6 8 6 9 6 12 6 16 6 20 6 31 7 10 9 3 C 6 Arrivals 1 4 1 15 5 9 5 12 5 14 6 1 7 1 7 12 16 3 Arrival alarm 10 18 10 20 10 23 16 1 Auto Tuning 2 3 9 2 Automatic sequencing C 3 Automatic squelch 1 3 2 1 Automatic zoom 3 10 3 11 Auto Request 14 23 14 28 14 30 AUX Page Group 10 1 Aviation data 3 12 3 16 3 19 B Backlighting 10 20 10 27 16 2 16 3 Bearing 1 6 1 11 3 4 3 8 3 13 3 14 5 9 5 13 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 8 8 9 16 9 16 12 Bottom Row Keys 1 4 C CAUTIONS vi CDI key 1 4 6 26 6 31 6 32 9 4 16 2 16 7 CDI scale 3 2 6 11 6 15 6 18 6 28 6 30 10 18 10 19 10 22 10 23 C 5 C 6 CDI switching 6 32 6 33 Ceiling and Visibility Graphics 14 36 Checklists 1 7 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 Closest point of flight plan 16 4 CLR Key 1 3 COM configuration 10 29 COM Flip flop Key 1 3 COM Power Volume Knob 1 3 COM volume 1 5 COM window 1 9 1 14 2 1 2 5 8 4 8 9 8 13 9 1 Contrast 10 20 Copying flight plans C 2 Course from fix flight plan 6 20 Creating a flight plan 6 5 Creating User Waypoints 7 20 Crossfill 3 5 5 6 10 2 10 3 10 8 10 9 D Database confirmation page 1
42. 8 The pilot should see the installer for corrective action Figure 14 8 Failed Message NO DATA NO DATA is displayed when no data is being received from the GTX 330 Figure 14 9 The pilot should be aware that this status may be a normal mode of operation in a dual transponder installation where the GTX 330 with TIS is not the selected transponder Figure 14 9 No Data Message OPER When the Traffic Page displays OPER in the upper right hand corner of the display Figure 14 11 the TIS system is in operational mode and available to display traffic on the Traffic or Map Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 7 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES STANDBY When the Traffic Page displays STANDBY Figure 14 10 the TIS system is in standby mode and cannot display traffic data Figure 14 10 Standby Message TRFC CST The TRFC CST traffic coasting banner located above the AGE indicator in Figure 14 6 indicates that displayed traffic is held even though the data is stale The pilot should be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this condition TRFC RMVD The TRFC RMVD banner Figure 14 11 indicates that traffic has been removed from the display due to the age of the data being too old to coast for the time period of 12 60 seconds from the last receipt of a TIS message The pilot should be
43. AVAILABLE Display TAWS FAILURE ALERT TAWS continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status If the terrain obstacle database is not available the aural message TAWS System Failure is generated along with TER FAIL in the annunciation window and TERRAIN FAILED on the TAWS Page Figure 13 11 Figure 13 11 TAWS FAILED Display GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 11 SECTION 13 TAWS 13 4 DATABASE INFORMATION FOR TAWS General Database Information Garmin TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive Pilots must familiarize themselves with the appropriate sectional charts for safe flight NOTE The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The terrain obstacle databases are contained on a datacard which is inserted in the right most slot of the GNS 530 units Appendix A NOTE Obstacles 200 and higher are included in the Obstacle Database It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be cont
44. Crossfill Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 7 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Copy Flight Plan Allows the pilot to copy the selected flight plan to a new flight plan location as described previously in this section The copy function is useful for duplicating an existing flight plan before making changes Delete Flight Plan Allows the pilot to remove the selected flight plan from memory as described previously in this section Deleting a flight plan does not delete the individual waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory Delete All Flight Plans Allows the pilot to remove all flight plans from memory Deleting all flight plans 1 Select the Delete All Flight Plans option from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 15 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 15 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 2 A confirmation window appears Figure 5 16 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key Figure 5 16 Delete All Flight Plans Window Sort List By Number Sort List by Comment Allows the pilot to select between a flight plan catalog sorted numerically by the flight plan number or sorted alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to each flight plan When either option is selected the other option appears on the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Sorting the catalog listing by number or
45. Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Symbol See Section 3 4 for a graphic illustration of available VOR symbols VAR Magnetic variation in degrees Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in megahertz MHz Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s frequency As mentioned in Section 7 1 VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city The VOR Page may also be used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the selected VOR s frequency Selecting a VOR frequency from the VOR Page 1 Select the VOR Page from the WPT Page Group as described in Section 7 1 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the VOR identifier field To select another VOR use the small and large right knobs and press the ENT Key when finished 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency field Figure 7 35 and press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window Figure 7 35 VOR Frequency Field Selected 4 To activate the standby VLOC frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 18 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 11 USER WAyPOINT PAGE In addition to the airport VOR NDB and intersection information contained in the Jeppesen Nav
46. Datalink Status Page shows the following fields Sat ID Connectivity This field shows the current activation status and signal strength of the XM Satellite Radio weather service Table 14 10 lists the messages that may be shown in the Sat ID field SAT ID FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION GDL 69 69A GNS 530 interface communications not yet established 0 1 2 or 3 Satellite radio service is not activated Satellite signal quality is indicated by the numbers 0 1 2 or 3 where 0 none 1 poor 2 good and 3 excellent XM GDL 69 69A not yet communicating with internal satellite radio hardware normal during power up X0 X1 X2 or X3 X Satellite radio service activated Satellite signal quality is indicated by the numbers 0 1 2 or 3 where 0 none 1 poor 2 good and 3 excellent Table 14 10 Sat ID Field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 35 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Table 14 11 lists the messages that may be shown in the Sat Connectivity field CONNECTIVITY FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Satellite in view Indicates a signal quality between 1 and 3 Searching No satellite is currently in view signal quality is 0 Table 14 11 Connectivity Field SATCOM Operation This field always indicates Idle for the GDL 69 69A SATCOM
47. ENT Key to select Figure 10 11 Type Field Highlighted GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 8 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 The flashing cursor moves to the time date field Use the small and large right knobs to set the time or date Figure 10 12 required before the message is displayed Time is entered as hours minutes seconds hhh mm ss Event based messages expire at a specific date and time Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 12 Date Field Selected Editing a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field 3 To edit the message text turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field Use the small and large right knobs to edit the message text entering the new text directly over the old message Press the ENT Key when finished 4 To edit the time field turn the large right knob to highlight the field Use the small and large right knobs to edit the new date or time entering the new value directly over the old figure Press the ENT Key when finished Deleting a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field 3
48. ENT Key to view the airspace information GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 19 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Flight Plans FPL The GNS 530 lets the pilot create up to 20 flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan Flight plans are created edited and activated using the FPL Key The FPL Page Group includes two pages the Active Flight Plan Page and the Flight Plan Catalog Page Figures 1 31 and 1 32 The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing features for the flight plan currently in use referred to as flight plan 00 The Flight Plan Catalog Page serves as the main page for creating new flight plans as well as editing or activating previously created flight plans Figure 1 31 Active Flight Plan Page Figure 1 32 Flight Plan Catalog Page Since using flight plans is arguably one of the more complex features of the GNS 530 it will be discussed only briefly here with focus on creating a new flight plan and activating it to use for navigation Answers to additional questions about flight plans not found in this brief introduction can be found in Section 5 Flight Plans Creating a new flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page 3 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 1 33 Figure 1 33 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 4 Turn the large right knob to selec
49. Extreme 60 12 7 Extreme 65 Extreme 70 Large 75 Large Table 14 6 NEXRAD Intensity Colors NOTE The information presented in this Pilot s Guide regarding NEXRAD is not meant to be comprehensive The NOAA website www noaa gov contains complete and detailed information regarding NEXRAD weather radar operation and theory GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 22 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Requesting NEXRAD Data NEXRAD data can be requested from the Data Link Page or the Map Page Requesting NEXRAD data from the Data Link Page 1 Select the Data Link Page from the AUX Page Group 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor NexRad Request is highlighted Figure 14 30 Figure 14 30 Data Link Page GDL 49 3 Press the ENT Key The NEXRAD Request Page see Figure 14 31 is displayed Figure 14 31 NEXRAD Request Page GDL 49 The NEXRAD Request Page has the following user selectable fields Center This field allows the pilot to specify reference points for the request The following five options are available for the Center field Current Position Request NEXRAD data from the aircraft s current position Look Ahead Request NEXRAD data ahead of along the current route From ID Request NEXRAD data from a specific waypoint identifier If From ID is selected as the reference point f
50. Figure 5 12 and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the large right knob to select the Method field Figure 5 13 3 Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual and press the ENT Key Auto automatically transfers the active flight plan or Direct to selection to another 400 or 500 series Garmin unit without user intervention 4 If Manual is selected Turn the large right knob to select the Transfer field then turn the small right knob to select the type of information to transfer between units active flight plan flight plan all user waypoints or a single user waypoint When Flight Plan or User Waypoint is selected a second field appears to the immediate right of the Transfer field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the number of the flight plan or the name of the user waypoint to be transferred 5 The Cross Side field allows the pilot to designate the sending and receiving units in a crossfill operation Turn the large right knob to select the Cross side field then turn the small right knob to select To or From Figure 5 14 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight Initiate Transfer Figure 5 14 and press the ENT Key Once Initiate Transfer is selected a progress bar at the bottom of the page indicates the status of the crossfill transfer until completed Figure 5 14
51. Flying an Approach with a Hold for more information on the SUSP annunciation and approaches with holding patterns Figure C 3 SUSP Annunciation GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C MAP DATUMS C 4 When should I use the OBS key to return to auto sequencing and what happens when I do The most common application for using the OBS Key is the missed approach The GNS 530 suspends automatic waypoint sequencing indicated by a SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS Key see Figure C 4 when the aircraft crosses the missed approach point MAP This prevents the GNS 530 from automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding point MAHP If a missed approach is required press the OBS Key to return to automatic waypoint sequencing and sequence the approach to the MAHP See Section 6 2 Flying the Missed Approach for more information on missed approaches Figure C 4 SUSP Annunciation Why won t my unit automatically sequence to the next waypoint The GNS 530 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled i e no OBS or SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS Key For automatic sequencing to occur the aircraft must also cross the bisector of the turn being navigated The bisector is a perpendicular line between two flight plan legs which crosses through the waypoint common to both legs How do I skip a waypoint i
52. Identifier Symbol and Type Map Im age Approach Procedure Name Transitions IAF s Feeder Routes and Vectors to Final Scrolling through the available approaches and transitions 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the approach APR procedure name field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available approaches for the selected airport Figure 7 20 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired approach GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 11 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Figure 7 20 Approach Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field 5 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Figure 7 21 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition or select VECTORS for guidance only along the final course segment of the approach Figure 7 21 Transitions Window 6 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob NOTE Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use When selecting an approach a GPS designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only ILS approaches
53. MAP DATUMS C 2 What happens when I select an approach Can I store a flight plan with an approach departure or arrival When loading an approach departure or arrival into the active flight plan a set of approach departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the selected instrument procedure Figure C 2 The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active unless the pilot activates the instrument procedure which may be done when the procedure is loaded or at a later time Figure C 2 Active Flight Plan Page Flight plans can also be stored with an approach departure or arrival Keep in mind that the active flight plan is erased when the unit is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated When storing flight plans with an approach departure or arrival the GNS 530 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints If the database is changed or updated the GNS 530 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified If an approach departure or arrival procedure is no longer available the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan or the correct database is installed For information on loading an approach departure or arrival see Section 6 1 See Section 5 1 for instructions on saving and copying flight plans Can I file slant Golf
54. Map Range GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 3 The graphic CDI shows the current position at the center of the indicator relative to the desired course the moving course deviation needle As with a traditional mechanical CDI when off course simply steer toward the needle The TO FROM arrow in the center of the scale indicates whether the aircraft is heading TO up arrow or FROM the waypoint down arrow Directly above the CDI appears the active leg of the flight plan or the direct to destination when using the Direct to Key This automatically sequences to the next leg of the flight plan as each interim waypoint is reached If no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected the destination field remains blank Quickly selecting the Default NAV Page from any page Press and holding the CLR Key NOTE The GNS 530 always navigates TO a waypoint unless the OBS switch is set preventing automatic waypoint sequencing or if the aircraft has passed the last waypoint in the flight plan The range of the look ahead map display appears in the bottom left corner Nine scale settings ranging from 5 0 nm to 200 nm are available Use the RNG Key to select the desired scale Adjusting the Map scale 1 Press the up arrow on the RNG Key to zoom out to a larger area OR 2 Press the down arrow on the RNG Key to zoom in to a smaller area Table 3 2 s
55. Menu 2 A confirmation window appears listing the procedure to be removed With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint 1 Select the Closest Point of FPL option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 30 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 30 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 A confirmation window appears for the selected reference waypoint Figure 5 31 Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint Figure 5 31 Closest Point of Flight Plan Window 4 The GNS 530 displays the bearing BRG and distance DIST to the closest point along the flight plan from the selected reference waypoint To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan highlight Load and press the ENT Key The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 14 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Shortcuts A number of shortcuts are available to save time when using the Active Flight Plan Page These shortcuts speed the process of removing approaches departures and arrivals and aid in selecting a specific flight plan leg for navigation guidance On t
56. NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn the small right knob and select WINDS 4 Press the small right knob The wind icons are displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying Temperature Dewpoints Temperature Dewpoints are displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying Temperature Dewpoints on the NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner data field flashes 3 Turn the small right knob and select TEMP DP 4 Press the small right knob The Temperature Dewpoints are displayed on the NAV Weather Page NOTE See a complete description of all METAR Wind and Temp Dewpoint symbols at the end of this section GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 33 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Troubleshooting Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A to correct any hardware problems the pilot can perform some quick troubleshooting steps to find the possible cause of a failure First ensure that the owner operator of the aircraft in which the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A is installed has subscribed to Echo Flight or XM Satellite Radio for a Service Plan and verify that it has been activated Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69
57. PROCEDURES 6 1 SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 1 APPROACHES DEPARTURES AND ARRIVALS The GNS 530 allows the pilot to fly non precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures All available approaches are stored on the Jeppesen NavData card and are automatically updated when the new card is inserted into the GNS 530 Subscription information for NavData cards is included in the GNS 530 package The Procedures Page Figure 6 1 is displayed by pressing the PROC Key The Procedures Page provides direct access to approaches departures and arrivals based on the active flight plan or direct to destination In either case the departure and destination airports must have published procedures associated with them Selecting an approach departure or arrival 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach Select Departure or Select Arrival Figure 6 1 and press the ENT Key Figure 6 1 Procedures Page 3 A window appears listing the available procedures Figure 6 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press the ENT Key When a direct to destination is selected departures are offered for the nearest airport Figure 6 2 Approach Window 4 A second window appears listing the available transitions Figure 6 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired
58. Page for the selected nearby airspace Figure 8 25 Figure 8 25 Airspace Page Status and Time to Entry Done Field Return to Previous Page Airspace Name and Type Floor Ceiling Limits Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Controlling Agency 5 To return to the Nearest Airspace Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 13 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES To view and quickly tune the frequency for a controlling agency 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 on the preceding page to display the Airspace Page for the desired controlled or special use airspace 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Frequencies and press the ENT Key Figure 8 26 Figure 8 26 Airport Frequency Page 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired frequency 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Figure 8 27 Figure 8 27 Airport Frequency Page Selected Frequency Standby Frequency 5 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 6 To return to the Airspace Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key or press the CLR K
59. Page within Current Page Group NOTE If the GNS 530 is unable to determine a GPS position the present position airplane symbol does not appear on the Map Page Different symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types The identifiers for any on screen waypoints can also be displayed The identifiers are enabled by default Special use and controlled airspace boundaries appear on the map showing the individual sectors for Class B Class C and Class D airspaces Table 3 3 shows the symbols used to depict the various airports and NAVAIDS on the Map Page Symbol Description Airport with hard surface runway s primary runway shown Airport with soft surface runway s only Private Airfield Heliport VOR VOR DME DME Localizer Intersection VORTAC TACAN NDB Locator Outer Marker Table 3 3 Map Page Symbols The Map Display can be set to 23 different range set tings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles statute and metric units are also available The range is indicated in the lower left hand corner of the Map Display Figure 3 9 and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the Map Display Selecting a map range 1 Press the up arrow of the RNG Key to zoom out to a larger map area 2 Press the down arrow of the RNG Key to zoom in to a smaller map area and more detail GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 7 An a
60. S Central time zone at the phone and fax numbers listed on page ii Garmin can also be reached by mail page ii or at our website address www garmin com Powering up the GNS 530 The GNS 530 s power and COM volume are controlled using the COM Power Volume knob at the top left corner of the unit Turning it clockwise turns unit power on and increases the COM radio volume After turning the unit on a welcome page is displayed while the unit performs a self test followed sequentially by the Unit Type Page Figure 1 4 and the Software Version Page Then depending on configuration the Weather Page the Traffic Page the Aviation Database Page and the Land Terrain Obstacles Database Page are sequentially displayed Figure 1 4 Unit Type Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 6 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION The Database Versions Page Figure 1 5 appears next which shows the current database information on the NavData and Terrain Data Cards Database information highlighted in yellow indicates the database is not within its effective dates The NavData database is updated every 28 days and must be current for approved instrument approach operations Information on database subscriptions is available inside the GNS 530 package Figure 1 5 Database Versions Page Acknowledging the database information Press the ENT Key Figure 1 6 Instrument Panel Self Test Page Check CDI HSI RMI and Othe
61. SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Left hand Keys and Knobs 1 COM Flip flop Key Swaps the active and standby COM frequencies Press and hold to select emergency channel 121 500 MHz 2 COM Power Volume Knob Controls unit power and communications radio volume Press momentarily to disable automatic squelch control 3 VLOC Flip flop Key Used to swap the active and standby VLOC frequencies i e make the selected stand by frequency active 4 VLOC Volume Knob Controls audio volume for the selected VOR Localizer frequency Press momentarily to enable disable the ident tone 5 Small Left Knob COM VLOC Used to tune the kilohertz kHz value of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver COM or the VLOC receiver whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor Press this knob momentarily to toggle the tuning cursor between the COM and VLOC frequency fields 6 Large Left Knob COM VLOC Used to tune the megahertz MHz value of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver COM or the VLOC receiver whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor Right hand Keys and Knobs 7 RNG Key Allows the pilot to select the desired map range Use the up arrow to zoom out to a larger area or the down arrow to zoom in to a smaller area 8 Direct to Key Provides access to the direct to func tion which allows the pilot to enter a destination waypoint and establishes a direct c
62. SER NUM The first eight characters of this field indicate the satellite radio ID number A dash separates the satellite radio ID from the currently installed METAR database version in the GDL 69 69A GDL SW This field shows the currently installed software version for the GDL 69 69A Standard Aviation Forecast Abbreviations The standard aviation forecast abbreviations are listed in Table 14 12 STANDARD AVIATION FORECAST ABBREVIATIONS Heavy Light Missing or separator Axxxx Altimeter setting xxxx are numbers AFT After BKN Broken clouds BLO Below BR Light fog CIG Ceiling CLR Sky clear DZ Drizzle FEW Few clouds FG Thick fog FM From FZ Freezing G Gusts KT Knots OBSCD Obscured OVC Overcast clouds Pxxxx Hourly Precipitation xxxx are numbers PRESFR Pressure falling rapidly PRESRR Pressure rising rapidly RA Rain RMK Remarks SCT Scattered clouds SLP Sea Level Pressure SM Statue Miles SN Snow TEMPO Occasionally Trrn Terrain TS Thunderstorm VV Vertical Visibility Table 14 12 Forecast Abbreviations GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 36 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES METAR Graphics The age symbols listed in Table 14 13 are common to METARs Winds and Temperature Dewpoint graph
63. and press the ENT Key Figure 7 22 Figure 7 22 Airport Approach Page 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Approach Page To select any of the other options from the Airport Approach Page Menu follow the preceding steps but select the desired option in step 3 7 6 AIRPORT ARRIVAL PAGE The Airport Arrival Page Figure 7 23 shows the available Airport Standard Terminal Arrival STAR procedures for the selected airport Where multiple transitions or runways are associated with the arrival procedure that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each arrival transition and runway To view arrival information for a particular airport on the Airport Arrival Page enter the airport s identifier per Section 7 1 Figure 7 23 Airport Arrival Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Arrival Procedure Name Transitions Runway associated with arrival Scrolling through the available arrivals 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the ARRIVAL procedure name field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available arrivals for the selected airport Figure 7 24 Continue turning the small right knob to selec
64. can be replaced with traffic information or configurable data fields as outlined in Section 10 4 Auto Tuning A frequency may also be quickly selected from the database by simply highlighting the desired frequency on the VOR Page Section 7 10 or the Nearest VOR Page Section 8 5 and pressing the ENT Key This process is referred to as auto tuning Once a frequency is selected in the standby field it may be transferred to the active frequency by pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key Auto tuning can also be performed from VLOC frequencies listed on the NAV COM Page the Airport Frequency Page and the Nearest Flight Service Station Page To select a VLOC frequency from the VOR Page or Nearest VOR Page 1 Select the desired page from the main pages as discussed in the preceding paragraph 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency for the desired VOR Figures 9 4 and 9 5 Figure 9 4 Frequency Highlighted on VOR Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 9 3 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER Figure 9 5 Frequency Highlighted on NRST VOR Page 4 Press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window 5 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE For duplex COM operations the VLOC receiver
65. comment 1 Select the Sort List By Number or Sort List By Comment option whichever is currently displayed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Figure 5 17 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 17 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 8 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS 5 2 ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for flight plan 00 the flight plan currently in use for navigation When a direct to or flight plan has been activated the Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the flight plan or a single waypoint for a direct to Figure 5 18 along with the desired track DTK and distance DIS for each leg Figure 5 18 Active Flight Plan Page Active Flight Plan Options The options shown in Table 5 1 are available for the Active Flight Plan Page Accessing the Active Flight Plan Menu Page 1 Press the FPL Key to view the Active Flight Plan Page 2 Press the MENU Key Figure 5 19 Figure 5 19 Active Flight Plan Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 9 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Page Menu Options Activate Leg Activates reactivates the flight plan and selects the highlighted leg as the active leg the leg which is currently used for navigation guidance Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer the active flight
66. coverage area the TER N A visual annunciation is removed Figure 12 8 TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE Display TERRAIN FAILURE ALERT TERRAIN continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status If the terrain obstacle database is not available TER FAIL is generated in the annunciation window and TERRAIN FAILED is generated on the TERRAIN Page Figure 12 9 Figure 12 9 TERRAIN FAILED Display GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 9 SECTION 12 TERRAIN 12 4 DATABASE INFORMATION FOR TERRAIN General Database Information Garmin TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive Pilots must familiarize themselves with the appropriate sectional charts for safe flight NOTE The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The terrain obstacle databases are contained on a datacard which is inserted in the right most slot of the GNS 530 units Appendix A NOTE Obstacles 200 and higher are included in the Obstacle Database It is very important to not
67. definitions may change without notice Database Coverage Area Worldwide WW Latitudes N75 to S60 Longitudes W180 to E180 United States US Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada Mexico Caribbean and the Pacific US Europe Alaska Austria Belgium Canada Caribbean Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hawaii Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Indicates partial coverage Table 13 5 Database Coverage Areas GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 1 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES CAUTION The Weather Data Link and TIS information contained in this section is not intended to replace the documentation that is supplied with the GDL 49 the GDL 69 A Data Link and the GTX 330 Transponder CAUTION TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve pilot responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during Instrument Meteorological Conditions IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in Visual Meteorological Conditions VMC Avoidance maneuvers are not recommended nor authorize
68. discussed previously in this section which allows the pilot to specify which leg of the flight plan is used for navigation guidance A shortcut also exists for this operation using the Direct to Key Activating a specific leg of the active flight plan 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint 2 Press the Direct to Key twice to display an Activate Leg confirmation window Figure 5 35 Figure 5 35 Activate Leg Window 3 With Activate highlighted press the ENT Key When using instrument procedures this feature can be used not only to activate a specific point to point leg but to also activate the procedure turn portion of an approach follow a DME arc or activate a holding pattern Any approach departure or arrival can be reviewed on the appropriate airport page in the Waypoint Page Group Section 7 1 Reviewing a procedure while viewing a flight plan page 1 With a flight plan page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the procedure header Figure 5 36 Figure 5 36 Procedure Header Highlighted 3 Press the ENT Key to select the WPT Page Group GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 16 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6
69. does not apply to i cosmetic damage such as scratches nicks and dents ii consumable parts such as batteries unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship iii damage caused by accident abuse misuse water flood fire or other acts of nature or external causes iv damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin or v damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin In addition Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and or used in contravention of the laws of any country THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace with a new or newly overhauled replacement product the prod
70. does not become less sensitive when further away from the destination For more information on the CDI scale see Section 10 4 Figure C 8 CDI Comparison 5 nm 5 nm 5 nm 5 nm 2 nm 2 nm GPS VOR What is the correct missed approach procedure How do I select the missed approach holding point To comply with TSO specifications the GNS 530 does not automatically sequence past the MAP The active to waypoint sequences to the first waypoint in the missed approach procedure when the OBS Key is pressed after crossing the MAP All published missed approach procedures must be followed as indicated on the approach plate To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP not recommended select the Active Flight Plan Page highlight the MAHP press the Direct to Key and then press the ENT Key twice How do I re select the same approach or activate a new approach after a missed approach After flying all missed approach procedures the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt from the Procedures Page Once given clearance for another attempt activate the approach from the Procedures Page by highlighting Activate Approach and then pressing the ENT Key The GNS 530 provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoin the approach in sequence from that point on See Section 5 2 Active Flight Plan Options for information on activating a specific flight plan leg To act
71. flashing cursor highlights the backlight mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired mode Auto or Manual Figure 10 41 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Figure 10 41 Backlight Mode Window 3 If Manual is selected the flashing cursor moves to the backlight level field Turn the small right knob to select the desired level Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Setup Page Nearest Airport Criteria Setting the minimum runway length and runway surface 1 Select Nearest Airport Criteria from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the runway surface field Figure 10 42 Turn the small right knob to select the desired surface The following options are available Any surface Hard surfaces only Hard or Soft surfaces Water landings only Figure 10 42 Surface Type Window 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the runway surface selection 4 The flashing cursor moves to the minimum runway length field To enter a different minimum runway length use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired length Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 28 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup Page Data Field Configuration Configuring the Auxiliary Data Field 1 Select Data Field Configuration from the Setup Page using the step
72. for example must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI Airport Approach Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Approach Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL Allows the pilot to load the selected approach into the active flight plan without activating it This performs the same operation as selecting Load from the Procedures Page Select Approach option See Section 6 1 Load and Activate Allows the pilot to load the selected approach into the active flight plan and activate navigation guidance to the approach transition Section 6 1 Select Next FPL Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available approaches for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available approaches for the active flight plan destination airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 12 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Loading an approach from the Airport Approach Page 1 Select the desired approach and transition using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Approach Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load into Active FPL
73. for intersections NDBs VORs and user created waypoints After a WPT page is selected information for a waypoint may be viewed by entering the identifier or name of the desired waypoint Airports NDBs and VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 2 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Entering a waypoint identifier 1 Select the desired WPT page and press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the small right knob to select the first character of the waypoint s identifier 3 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character Figure 8 2 Figure 7 2 Waypoint Identifier Selected 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the identifier is selected then press the ENT Key 6 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Entering a waypoint facility name or city location 1 Select the Airport Location Page NDB Page or VOR Page from the WPT Page Group as described on the preceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to select the facility name or location city field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character Figure 7 3 Figure 7 3 Facility Location Field Selected 5 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 6 Repeat step
74. from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the time format field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available time formats Local 12hr Local 24hr or UTC Figure 10 39 Figure 10 39 Time Format Window 3 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired time format 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Setting the local time 1 Select Date Time from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the time offset field Figure 10 40 Figure 10 40 Time Offset Field Selected 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired offset beginning by entering a minus or plus sign to indicate whether the offset is behind UTC or ahead of UTC In the United States all local time offsets use minus or behind UTC 4 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected offset NOTE When a local time offset is entered only Local 12 hour or Local 24 hour can be selected The UTC time format setting ignores any time offset entry GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 27 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup Page Display Backlight Changing the backlighting intensity 1 Select Display Backlight from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The
75. fuel flow FF field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the fuel flow rate Press the ENT Key when finished Note that if a fuel system is providing current fuel flow the fuel flow field defaults to this value 8 The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the ground speed Press the ENT Key when finished 9 With all variables entered the following information is provided REQ Quantity of fuel required LFOB Left over fuel on board LRES Left over fuel reserve time EFF Efficiency expressed in distance per fuel units e g nautical miles per gallon RNG Range distance ENDUR Flight endurance or total available flight time 10 To reconfigure the data fields press the MENU Key to display the options window Figure 10 13 Turn the small right knob to highlight the change fields option Press the ENT Key to reconfigure the data fields Turn the large right knob to select the desired field Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired data Press the ENT Key to select the data configuration Flight Planning Page Trip Planning Performing trip planning operations 1 Select Trip Planning from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in this section 2 The current trip planning leg mode is displayed at the top of the page POINT TO POINT or FPL LEG f
76. indicating the auto waypoint sequencing is suspended This message also appears if Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage DOES NOT exist for the current phase of flight along with a RAIM not available from FAF to MAP message Approaching target altitude The current GPS computed altitude is within 500 feet of the final Vertical Navigation target altitude Approaching VNAV profile The aircraft is within one minute of reaching the initial Vertical Navigation descent or climb point Arrival at waypoint waypoint name The aircraft is within the arrival alarm circle for the indicated waypoint The size of the arrival alarm circle is defined from the CDI Alarms menu option on the Setup Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 2 Cannot navigate locked FPL The pilot has attempted to navigate a flight plan FPL with one or more locked waypoints A waypoint can be locked when the NavData card is replaced and the waypoint s does not exist in the new database Can t change an active waypoint An attempt has been made to modify the position of the active to or from waypoint The GNS 530 does not allow modifications to user waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance Can t delete an active or FPL waypoint An attempt has be
77. is active when the landing gear is extended Level A is also active when groundspeed is less than 120 knots with no radar altimeter present in a fixed gear aircraft Sensitivity Level Intruder Altitude Available TA Alerting Conditions A Yes Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation Or Intruder range is within 0 2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet A No Intruder closing rate is less than 15 seconds B Yes Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation Or Intruder range is within 0 55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet B No Intruder closing rate is less than 20 seconds Table 14 5 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria In all other conditions Level B greater sensitivity TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats Traffic Symbology Traffic information from the GTS 8XX is displayed on the GNS 530 unit using TAS TCAS symbology Table 14 4 on a dedicated Traffic page and on the moving Map Page The displayed traffic information generally includes the relative range bearing and altitude of intruder aircraft The GTS 8XX also generates aural announcements heard on the cockpit audio system Target altitude relative to own aircraft altitude relative altitude is displayed in hundreds of feet for each target symbol Figure 14 19 If traffic is above own aircraft altitude the relative altitu
78. is configured for Weather Data Link Interface with a GDL 49 or GDL 69 pressing the CLR Key while viewing the Map Page reduces the NEXRAD density one incremental step All NEXRAD data is removed if the CLR Key is pressed while density is set to low Request Shortcuts The pilot can quickly select the NEXRAD METAR or Textual METAR Page for a specific airport from the Airport Location Page Three methods of selecting the Airport Location Page Use the small and large right knobs to select the Airport Location Page from the WPT Group of pages On the Map Page move the target pointer to highlight an on screen airport Press the ENT Key On any page that displays an airport identifier use the cursor and highlight the desired airport identifier Press the ENT Key Once the Airport Location Page is displayed enter the identifier for the desired airport Press the MENU Key The options menu appears Figure 14 36 listing the following three options Request NEXRAD Request METAR View Text METAR if available Figure 14 36 Airport Location Page Options Menu Highlight the desired option and press the ENT Key Request NEXRAD and Request METAR options select the NEXRAD and METAR Request Pages respectively View Text METAR selects the Textual METAR Page for the desired airport if textual METAR is available for that airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference
79. knob to scroll through any additional database listings Figure 7 6 for the selected facility name or location Scroll backwards with the small right knob if the desired facility name or location has been scrolled past Figure 7 5 Last Facility for Charlotte 4 Press the ENT Key to select the desired facility name or location 5 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 4 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Selecting a waypoint identifier from a list of duplicates 1 Select the desired airport or NAVAID identifier following the preceding steps under To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 2 A Duplicate Waypoints Window appears Figure 7 6 Turn the large right knob to select the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 7 6 Duplicate Waypoints Window 3 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob 7 2 AIRPORT LOCATION PAGE The Airport Location Page Figure 7 7 displays the latitude longitude and elevation of the selected airport The Airport Location Page also displays facility name and location as well as fuel availability available approaches radar coverage and airspace type To view location information for a particular airport on the Airport Location Page enter the airport s identifier per Section 7 1 8 5 2 3 1 4 9 7 6 Figure 7 7 Airport Location Page 1
80. may be auto tuned from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page See Section 8 8 for more info Tuning the VLOC when an approach is active When selecting a VOR or ILS approach manual tuning of the VLOC receiver is not required Once the approach procedure is Loaded or Activated the GNS 530 automatically places the proper frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window To use this frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the frequency Additional information on approach procedures is provided in Section 6 1 To select an approach and automatically tune the proper VLOC frequency 1 Select the destination airport using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in the active flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach and press the ENT Key Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 Procedures Page 4 A window appears listing the available procedures Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press the ENT Key When a direct to destination is selected departures are offered for the nearest airport 5 A second window appears listing available transitions Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The approach Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidanc
81. no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected only speed track altitude and minimum safe altitude data may be displayed All other data types appear as blank lines on the Default NAV Page until a destination is selected Selecting a different data item for any data field 1 Starting with the Default NAV Page press the MENU Key to display the Default NAV Page Menu Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 Default NAV Page Menu 2 The Change Fields option is already highlighted so press the ENT Key to select this option 3 Use the large right knob to highlight the data field to be changed 4 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available data items Figure 3 6 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item from the list Figure 3 6 Select Field Type Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 5 5 Press the ENT Key to select the desired data item and return to the Default NAV Page 6 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor from the page Restoring Factory Settings All data fields settings can be quickly returned to original factory settings Restoring all six data fields to factory default settings 1 From the Default NAV Page press the MENU Key to display the Default NAV Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Restore Defaults option Figure 3 7 and pre
82. plan between two 400 or 500 series Garmin units in a dual unit installation See Section 10 2 Flight Planning Crossfill for additional information on this feature Copy Flight Plan Copies the active flight plan to a flight plan catalog location as described previously in this section The copy function is useful for duplicating the active flight plan before making changes Invert Flight Plan Reverses the active flight plan See Section 5 1 Activating Flight Plans and Inverting Flight Plans Delete Flight Plan Allows the pilot to remove all waypoints from the selected flight plan as described previously in this section Deleting a flight plan does not delete the waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory Select Approach Allows the pilot to select a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replace the current approach with a new selection In many cases it is convenient to select approaches using the PROC Key as described in Section 6 1 Select Arrival Allows the pilot to select a published standard terminal arrival route STAR for the destination airport or replace the current arrival with a new selection Section 6 1 for information on selecting arrivals using the PROC Key Select Departure Allows the pilot to select a published standard instrument departure SID for the departure airport or replace the current departure with a new selection When using a direct
83. section GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 17 Vectors to Final Take a second look at the VOR 22 approach into Billard Municipal Instead of following the DME arc ATC tells the pilot to expect vectors onto the final approach course There are several ways to select vectors to final with the GNS 530 The first two options below normally require the least workload to accomplish When the approach is first selected choose VECTORS from the Transitions Window Load a full approach including the IAF from the Transitions Window as described in Section 6 1 When cleared press the PROC Key and select Activate Vectors To Final Load the full approach as described in Section 6 1 Use the Direct to Key by pressing it twice from the Active Flight Plan Page to select the desired leg of the approach Selecting VECTORS from the Transitions Window 1 Select Billard Municipal KTOP as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key and select the VOR 22 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 3 From the Transitions Window select VECTORS Figure 6 41 Figure 6 41 Transitions Window 4 Select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach Activating vectors to final from the Procedures Page 1 Select Billa
84. switches from terminal mode to approach mode APR appears in the lower left corner of the screen replacing TERM CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection 6 When approaching the FAF NEXT DTK 265 appears along the bottom of the screen 7 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP MA25 8 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears along the bottom of the screen 9 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 52 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined below Figure 6 52 SUSP Annunciation GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 22 Course from fix to altitude legs show the specific target altitude on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Default NAV Page The missed approach sequence for the Palmdale VOR DME RWY 25 approach includes a course from fix to altitude leg MISSED APPROACH Climb to 5000 outbound via PMD VOR R 282 then climbing RIGHT turn to 7000 direct PMD VOR and hold DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION MISSED APPROACH Palmdale CA AF Plant 42 VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25 Figure 6 53 Palmdale Missed Approach In this instance the leg corres
85. the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence the CDI Key may be used to manually switch the external CDI output to the GPS receiver GPS is indicated above the CDI Key If the pilot leaves the CDI output on VLOC and the pilot is using an external CDI not an HSI expect reverse sensing on the backcourse of the ILS GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 32 6 4 POINTS TO REMEMBER FOR ALL APPROACHES The GNS 530 is designed to complement printed approach plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach However the pilot must always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate The active leg or the portion of the approach currently in use is depicted in magenta on the Map Page When flying the approach the GNS 530 automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless SUSP appears above the OBS Key SUSP indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on the current leg and normally appears at holding patterns and upon crossing the missed approach point MAP Points to Remember for Localizer based Approaches The default factory setting allows the CDI output to automatically switch from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver If the ILS CDI Capture setting is changed to Manual the pilot must determine when to select GPS or VLOC guidance during the a
86. the flight plan along the closest leg Specifying a Course to a Waypoint When performing a direct to the GNS 530 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination The course to the destination can also be manually defined using the CRS course field on the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Manually defining the direct to course 1 Press the Direct to Key 2 Use the small and large right knobs to select the destination waypoint 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint then turn the large right knob to highlight the course CRS field Figure 4 14 Figure 4 14 CRS Course Field Highlighted 4 Turn the small and large right knobs to select the desired course Figure 4 15 and press the ENT Key Figure 4 15 Course Field Selected 5 Press the ENT Key again to begin navigation using the selected destination and course 6 To re select a direct course from present position or select a new manually defined course simply press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 1 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The GNS 530 lets the pilot create up to 20 different flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan The Flight Plan Page Group consists of two pages Active Flight Plan Page and Flight Plan Catalog Page Figures 5 1 and 5 2 accessed by pressing the FPL Key The flight
87. the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer 2 Turn the small right knob to move up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise 3 Turn the large right knob to move right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on an object the name of that object is highlighted even if the name wasn t originally displayed on the map This feature applies to airports NAVAIDS user created waypoints roads lakes rivers almost everything displayed on the map except route lines When an airport NAVAID or user waypoint is selected on the Map Display information about the waypoint can be reviewed or the waypoint can be designated as the direct to destination Reviewing information for an on screen airport NAVAID or user waypoint 1 Use the panning function as described in the preceding procedure to place the target pointer on a waypoint Figure 3 12 2 Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page s for the selected waypoint Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 Information for On Screen Waypoint 3 Press the CLR Key to exit the information page s GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 9 Map Direct to Designating an on screen airport NAVAID or user waypoint as the direct to destination 1 Use th
88. to the GNS 530 uses the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available departures See Section 6 1 for information on selecting departures using the PROC Key Remove Approach Deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan Remove Arrival Deletes the current STAR from the active flight plan Remove Departure Deletes the current SID from the active flight plan Closest Point of FPL Calculates the bearing and closest distance that a flight plan passes from a reference waypoint May also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to the reference waypoint Change Fields Allows the pilot to select the desired data items to display on the Active Flight Plan Page as described in this Section Restore Defaults Returns the data items to factory defaults as described in this Section Table 5 1 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Options GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 10 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The data fields for DTK and DIS are user selectable and may be changed to display cumulative distance CUM to each waypoint estimated time of arrival ETA estimated time enroute ETE or enroute safe altitude ESA Changing a data field on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Chang
89. to be used with 28 Vdc power only For questions on a particular installation please refer to a Garmin authorized service center GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS B 2 Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C MAP DATUMS C 1 APPENDIX C TROUBLESHOOTING Q amp A This section is designed to answer some of the common questions regarding the GNS 530 s capabilities and operation If there is a problem operating the unit read through this appendix and refer to the reference section noted If the answer to a particular question is not covered here use the index to find the appropriate section elsewhere in this manual If after reading through the appropriate reference section the answer cannot be found please see an authorized dealer or contact Garmin directly at the address or phone numbers listed on page ii Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate a position within a specified protection limit 4 nm for oceanic 2 nm for enroute 1 nm for terminal and 0 3 nm for non precision approaches During oce
90. to highlight the zoom field for the desired feature 4 Turn the small right knob to select the maximum range at which the feature should appear on screen or select Off to never display the selected feature 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 13 Distance Measurements The Measure Dist option provides a quick easy method for determining the bearing and distance between any two points on the Map Display Measuring bearing and distance between two points 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Measure Dist Figure 3 21 Figure 3 21 Map Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key an on screen reference pointer appears on the Map Display at the present position 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the desired location to measure FROM and press the ENT Key Figure 3 22 Figure 3 22 Using Pointer to Measure Distance and Bearing 4 Again use the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the desired location to measure TO The bearing and distance from the first reference location appears at the top of the Map Display 5 To exit the Measure Dist option press the small right knob Adding Data Fields to the Map The Data Fields On option provides a Map Display Figure 3 23 with five user selecta
91. transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The approach Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course Figure 6 3 Transitions Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 2 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate approaches only and press the ENT Key Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed 6 For precision approaches and some non precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receivers and external CDI or HSI for primary navigation To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use When selecting an approach a GPS designation to the right of the procedure name Figure 6 4 indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only ILS approaches for example must be f
92. will have adequate satellite geometry during the flight RAIM availability is near 100 in Oceanic Enroute and Terminal phases of flight Because FAA TSO requirements for non precision approaches specify significantly better satellite coverage than other flight phases RAIM may not be available when flying some approaches The GNS 530 automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warn the pilot if RAIM is not available In such cases use an external LOC receiver instead for many of the non precision and precision approaches stored on the Jeppesen NavData Card RAIM prediction helps the pilot plan for a pending flight to confirm GPS operation during an approach An INTEG annunciation at the bottom left corner of the screen Figure 10 17 indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built in RAIM tests When this occurs the GPS receiver continues to provide navigation information but should not be used for primary navigation guidance Use an alternate navigation source Figure 10 17 INTEG Annunciation GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 12 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES If a WARN annunciation appears at the bottom left corner GPS satellite coverage may be sufficient but the GNS 530 has detected a position error which exceeds protection limits In this condition all GPS navigation data on the GNS 530 is disabled Use an alternate navigation source Software V
93. 0 unit GDL 69 69A NEXRAD and METAR data is collected by the National Weather Service and disseminated to WxWorks a weather information provider This data is then delivered to XM Satellite for rebroadcast Data from two XM satellites is then made immediately available to XM customers The GDL 69 69A receives streaming weather data processes the data then sends it to the GNS 530 unit for display Functions provided by the Weather Data Link system include Request for and display of NEXRAD radar imagery Request for and display of text based METAR data Request for and display of a compressed form of METAR data that allows icon representations at reporting stations on a moving map indicating visibility ceiling etc Position tracking services are provided through periodic position report transmissions from the GNS 530 unit available with GDL 49 only GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 20 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Weather Products The following weather products are available for display on the 500 Series unit via the Weather Data Link interface NEXRAD Data Graphical METAR Data Text based METAR Data Graphical Temperature Dewpoint Data Graphical Wind Data NEXRAD Description WSR 88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD NEXt generation RADar is a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detectio
94. 00 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 PULL UP PULL UP SINK RATE Descent Rate FPM Height Above Terrain Feet Figure 13 8 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 9 SECTION 13 TAWS Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert NCR The purpose of the Negative Climb Rate NCR After Takeoff alert also referred to as Altitude Loss After Takeoff is to provide suitable alerts to the pilot when the system determines that the aircraft is losing altitude closing upon terrain after takeoff The aural message Don t Sink is given for NCR alerts accompanied by an annunciation and a pop up terrain alert on the display NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following condi tions are met The height above the terrain is less than 700 feet The distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less The heading change from the heading at the time of departure is less than 110 degrees Figure 13 9 shows two figures which illustrate the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO C151b The NCR alert is issued when the altitude loss and height are within the range in the first figure or when the sink rate negative vertical speed and height are within the range in the second figure 1000 800 600 400 200 Height Above Terrain Feet Altitude Loss Feet
95. 00 Rev H 14 28 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Auto Request This field is used to set the time interval for the system to automatically send the position The time options are OFF 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hr When an auto request time is selected the first report is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a report Note that in order to take advantage of EchoFlight s Automatic Weather Delivery AWD service the time interval must be set to 15 minutes Manual Send This field is used to send out a current single position report Figure 14 40 Figure 14 40 Position Report Page Requesting Graphical METARS Graphical METAR data can be requested from the Data Link Page Map Page or Airport Page Requesting graphical METARS from the Data Link Page 1 Select the Data Link Page from the AUX Page Group 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the small right knob and highlight Metar Request Figure 14 41 Figure 14 41 Data Link Page 3 Press the ENT Key The METAR REQUEST Page is displayed Figure 14 42 Figure 14 42 Metar Request Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 29 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES The METAR Request Page has the following user selectable fields Format This field is used to select between requesting the r
96. 000 user created waypoints Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 10 WPT Pages see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 7 1 Page Groups Airport Location Airport Runway Airport Frequency Airport Approach Airport Arrival Airport Departure Intersection NDB VOR User Waypoint Figure 7 1 WPT Pages Quickly selecting a WPT page 1 From any page press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page this step may be skipped if the unit is already displaying any of the main pages 2 Turn the large right knob to select the WPT Page Group WPT appears along the bottom of the screen 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired WPT page NOTE The GNS 530 uses International Civil Aviation Organization ICAO identifiers for all airports All U S airport identifiers which contain only letters use the prefix K For example Los Angeles International is KLAX under the ICAO standard Other airports such as Otten Memorial 3VS that contain numbers in the identifier do not require the K prefix Many foreign countries use two letter prefixes The WPT Page Group includes ten pages Figure 7 1 While viewing any WPT page turn the small right knob to select a different WPT page The first six pages provide detailed information for the selected airport location runways frequencies approaches arrivals and departures The last four pages provide information
97. 1 approach Section 6 1 for additional instructions 5 From the Transitions Window select BODRY intersection as the IAF Figure 6 25 Also select Activate to load and activate the approach Figure 6 25 TRANS Transitions Window 6 Once the approach has been activated the Active Flight Plan Page appears Figure 6 26 The pilot may review the approach sequence by pressing the small right knob and turning the large right knob Press the FPL Key to return to the navigation pages Figure 6 26 Active Flight Plan Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 11 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 27 Terminal Mode Refer to Figure 6 27 for the following steps 7 As in the last example within 30 nm of the airport the GNS 530 switches from enroute to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 8 Just prior to crossing BODRY intersection a HOLD TEARDROP alert appears along the bottom of the screen to suggest the proper holding pattern entry HOLD DIRECT or HOLD PARALLEL may be offered on other similar approaches 9 As mentioned in the missed approach example the Default NAV Page displays a timer during the holding pattern Figure 6 28 The timer can be used to fly the one minute outbound portion of the holding pattern The holding pattern is displayed on the Ma
98. 13 TAWS 13 1 13 1 INTRODUCTION 13 1 13 2 TAWS Page 13 3 13 3 TAWS Alerts 13 4 13 4 Database Information for TAWS 13 11 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 14 1 14 1 Traffic Information Service TIS Interface 14 1 14 2 GTS 8XX Traffic Systems 14 11 14 3 Weather Data Link Interface 14 19 SECTION 15 FAULT DETECTION and EXCLUSION 15 1 15 1 Detection and Exclusion 15 1 15 2 Pre Departure Verification of FDE 15 2 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H iv TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS and NAV TERMS 16 1 16 1 Messages 16 1 16 2 Abbreviations 16 9 16 3 Navigation Terms 16 12 Appendix A Data Card Use A 1 Appendix B Specifications
99. 14 29 NEXRAD Intensity 14 21 NEXRAD Request Page 14 22 NOAA 14 21 Non Bearing Traffic Advisory 14 8 NRST Page Group 1 16 8 1 O OBS key 1 4 6 8 6 9 6 11 6 13 6 16 6 20 6 25 6 31 6 32 16 1 16 6 C 2 C 6 Odometer 10 16 Overzoom 3 7 P Packing List 1 1 Page groups 1 3 3 1 8 1 10 1 PDA premature descent alert 12 5 Pointer panning 3 8 3 9 3 13 4 5 7 20 Position format 1 5 10 25 Position page 16 1 16 5 Powering up the GNS 530 1 3 1 5 Precipitation Graphics 14 36 Procedures Page 1 15 6 1 6 4 6 17 7 14 7 15 9 3 C 6 Procedure turn 5 15 6 4 6 7 6 26 6 28 6 29 6 33 PROC Key 1 4 1 15 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 9 6 10 6 14 6 17 6 18 6 23 6 27 9 3 C 6 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 4 INDEX R Radar coverage 7 5 RAIM prediction 10 16 RAIM protection limits 10 17 Reference waypoint 5 9 5 13 7 18 7 23 Remove the NavData card A 2 Removing approaches 5 14 Requesting Graphical METARS 14 28 Request METAR 14 26 Request NEXRAD 14 26 Right hand Keys and Knobs 1 3 RNG key 1 3 3 6 3 16 3 19 7 6 7 7 Roads 3 8 3 12 ROC 13 5 RTC required terrain clearance 12 5 Runway information 1 16 8 4 S Satellite Status Page 1 8 3 23 15 1 Scheduler message 16 6 Scroll Bar 1 4 3 22 8 3 8 5 8 6 Select Approach 1 15 5 11 6 1 6 4 6 9 7 11 9 3 C 6 Select Arrival 1 15 5 12 6 1 Select Departure 1 15 5 12 6 1 Self test 1 5 Setup Page 10 18
100. 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 27 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Data Link Request Log Page GDL 49 Only The Data Link Request Log Page Figure 14 38 is used to display the data that was requested When a request is received a check mark is placed in the box Viewing the Data Link Request Log Page 1 Use the small and large right knobs and select the Data Link Page from the AUX Group of pages 2 Highlight Data Link Log Figure 14 37 and press the ENT Key Figure 14 37 Data Link Page 3 The Data Link Request Log Page is displayed Figure 14 38 Figure 14 38 Data Link Request Log Page Sending Position Reports GDL 49 Only The Data Link allows for accurate location tracking of the aircraft by sending the aircraft s position manually or automatically to the EchoFlight website www EchoFlight com for use by third party EchoFlight customers Sending the Present Position 1 Select the Data Link Page see preceding step 1 2 Highlight Position Report Figure 14 39 and press the ENT Key Figure 14 39 Data Link Page 3 The Position Report Page is displayed with the following six fields Nearest VOR Nearest VOR identifier Distance The distance from the nearest VOR Radial The radial from the nearest VOR Position Displays the aircraft s current position expressed in Latitude and Longitude GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181
101. 4 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION NOTE Data is entered using the large and small right knobs Figure 1 2 Experiment with them to become efficient at entering data This will greatly reduce the amount of time spent operating the GNS 530 in flight Figure 1 2 Blank Direct to Page NOTE When the GNS 530 is displaying a list of information that is too long for the display screen a scroll bar appears along the right hand side of the display Figure 1 3 The scroll bar graphically indicates the number of additional items available within the selected category To scroll through the list press the small right knob to activate the cursor then turn the large right knob Figure 1 3 Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Bottom Row Keys 14 CDI Key Used to toggle which navigation source GPS or VLOC provides output to an external HSI or CDI 15 OBS Key Used to select manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints Pressing the OBS Key selects OBS mode which retains the current active to waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint i e prevents sequencing to the next waypoint Pressing the OBS Key again returns the unit to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints When OBS mode is selected the pilot may set the desired course to from a waypoint using the Select OBS Course pop up window or an external OBS selector on the HSI or CDI 16 MSG Key Used to view system messages and to alert
102. 530 for airports and cities Large airports are those with a runway longer than 8100 feet Medium airports include those with a runway longer than 5000 feet or with a control tower Large cities are those with approximate populations greater than 200 000 and medium cities with greater than 50 000 The following settings are available for each group Map Orientation AutoZoom Land Data Aviation Data Weather Lightning Mode Symbol when applicable Traffic Traffic Mode Symbol Label when applicable Airport Large Medium Small Airports and Text NAVAID VORs NDBs Intersections and Text Waypoint User Waypoints Waypoint Text Flight Plan Wpts Line Active Flight Plan Lat Long Control Controlled Airspace Class B C D tower zone Airspace Special Use Airspace Restricted MOA Other City Large Medium Small Cities and Text Road Freeway National Highway Local Hwy Local Road Other States Prov Rivers Lakes Railroads Wind Vector GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 11 Changing the map orientation 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map Figure 3 16 and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map Figure 3 18 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 18 Map Setup Window 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Orientation field 4 Turn the small right knob to se
103. 6 10 17 10 18 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 5 INDEX V Vectors To Final 3 3 6 17 Vertical Navigation 16 1 16 11 VLOC audio 9 1 VLOC flip flop key 1 3 1 14 6 28 6 33 7 17 8 7 8 10 9 2 9 3 9 4 16 6 16 8 VLOC volume knob 1 3 9 1 VLOC window 1 9 1 14 2 2 3 22 6 25 6 27 7 8 7 17 8 7 8 10 9 1 9 3 9 4 Volume 1 3 1 5 2 1 9 1 VORs 1 11 1 16 3 10 3 16 3 19 4 2 7 1 7 17 8 1 8 2 8 6 VSR 3 4 16 11 16 13 W Warranty vi vii Waypoint alerts C 5 Waypoint List 7 22 7 23 7 25 Waypoint sequencing 3 3 6 11 6 23 16 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 Weather Age Graphic 14 36 Weather broadcast 7 16 7 17 Weather Data Link 14 1 14 19 14 20 Weather Legend Page 14 31 Winds aloft 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 6 Wind Speed Graphics 14 37 WPT page group 5 15 7 1 7 2 7 17 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 6 INDEX Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe KS 66062 U S A p 913 397 8200 f 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A p 503 391 3411 f 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 9RB U K p 44 0 870 8501241 f 44 0 870 8501251 Garmin Corporation No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan p 886 2 2642 9199 f 886 2 2642 9099 www garmin com 190 00181 00 Rev H 2009 Garmin Ltd or its
104. 8 Airport Departure Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Departure Procedure Name Transitions Runway Associated with Departure Scrolling through the available departures 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the departure DEP procedure name field Figure 7 28 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 15 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available departures for the selected airport Figure 7 29 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired departure Figure 7 29 Departure Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the runway field 5 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available runways Figure 7 30 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway ALL may appear in the runway field indicating the departure procedure applies to all runways For airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the departure procedure applies to both runways Figure 7 30 Runway Window 6 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field 7 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Cont
105. A has power applied If a failure still exists continue to the Data Link Status Page The fields on the Data Link Status Page may provide insight to a possible failure Information displayed at this page should be noted and provided to the repair station The Connectivity Message table should also provide a clear indication of any potential internal failures If no indications exist check the circuit breakers and electrical connections to the GDL 49 or GDL 69 69A and ensure the unit has power applied Repair stations are equipped to repair the system should a hardware failure exist Monitoring the Data Link The Data Link Status Page provides an indication of the integrity of the Data Link The Data Link Page allows the pilot to monitor the system and determine the possible cause of a failure View the Data Link Status Page 1 From the AUX Page Group select the Data Link Page 2 Highlight Data Link Status and press the ENT Key 3 The Data Link Status Page Figure 14 46 is displayed Figure 14 46 Data Link Status Page The GDL 49 Datalink Status Page shows the following fields TX Queue Shows the number of requests in the GDL 49 s transmit queue waiting to be sent to the satellite RX Queue Shows the number of responses in the GDL 49 s receive queue waiting to be sent to the GNS 530 Sat ID Connectivity Shows the current satellite in view and also indicates the status of
106. Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available arrivals for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available arrivals for the active flight plan destination airport Loading an arrival procedure from the Airport Arrival Page 1 Select the desired arrival transition and runway using the steps above 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Arrival Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key to select the Load into Active FPL option Figure 7 27 Figure 7 27 Airport Arrival Page Menu 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Arrival Page To select any of the other options from the Airport Arrival Page Menu follow the preceding steps but select the desired option in step 3 7 7 AIRPORT DEPARTURE PAGE The Airport Departure Page Figure 7 28 shows the available Airport Standard Instrument Departure SID procedures for the selected airport Where multiple runways or transitions are associated with the departure procedure that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each departure runway and transition To view departure information for a particular airport on the Airport Departure Page enter the airport s identifier per Section 7 1 Figure 7 2
107. Best Available Approach 2 Position Latitude Longitude 3 Facility Name and Location City 4 Airport Identifier Symbol and Type 5 Field Elevation and Available Fuels 6 Radar Coverage and Airspace Type 7 Position of Current Page within Current Page Group 8 Current Page Group 9 Number of Pages in Current Page Group GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 5 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS Elevation In feet or meters Fuel For public use airports the available fuel type s are Avgas 80 87 100LL 100 130 Mogas Jet or None Approach Best available approach ILS MLS LOC LDA SDF GPS VOR RNAV RNV LORAN LOR NDB TACAN TCN Helicopter HEL or VFR Radar Radar coverage Yes or No Airspace Control environment Class B Class C Class D CTA TMA TRSA or none NOTE Upon active navigation changes the active destination airport is used as the default airport on the WPT pages Manual selection of the destination airport is available from the page menu Airport Location Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Location Page by pressing the MENU Key Select Next F
108. Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 11 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Selecting a menu option from the Utility Page 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 15 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option 3 Press the ENT Key to view the selected page Figure 10 16 Figure 10 16 Trip Statistics Page The following menu options are available Checklists Provides up to nine different user defined checklists containing up to 30 items each Flight Timers Provides count up down timers plus automatic recording of departure time and total trip time Departure and total trip time recording can be configured to run either any time GNS 530 power is on or only when ground speed exceeds 30 knots Trip Statistics Provides readouts for trip odometers average speed and maximum speed These readouts are resettable individually or all at once by pressing the MENU Key to display the Trip Statistics Page Menu RAIM Prediction Predicts if GPS coverage is available for the current location or at a specified waypoint at any time and date Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM performs checks to ensure that the GNS 530
109. Data card the GNS 530 allows the pilot to store up to 1 000 user defined waypoints The User Waypoint Page Figure 7 36 displays the waypoint name up to five characters long identifier radial from two reference waypoints and distance from one reference waypoint along with the user waypoint s latitude longitude position Figure 7 36 User Waypoint Page User Waypoint Name Reference Waypoint Information Create Modify Action Field Latitude Longitude Position Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations appear on the User Waypoint Page REF WPT Reference waypoint identifier name RAD Radial from reference waypoint in degrees magnetic or degrees true depending upon unit configuration DIS Distance from reference waypoint in nautical miles statute miles kilometers depending upon unit configuration Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS User waypoints may only be selected by name identifier as described in Section 7 1 Creating User Waypoints User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint Page or the Map Page To create a new user waypoint simply enter its name identifier and position or reference another waypoint by radial and distance Creating a new user waypoint by entering its la
110. For METAR Data Age of Data in Minutes Ceiling Visibility and Precipitation Ceiling Visual Flight Rules Precipitation For Wind Data Age of Data in Minutes Winds Wind Gust For Temperature Dewpoint Data Age of Data in Minutes Temperature Dewpoint Displaying Textual METARS Once received textual METARS are displayed on the METARS Text Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 32 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Selecting the METARS Text Page 1 Select the Data Link Page 2 Select Textual Metar 3 Press the ENT Key The Textual METAR Page Figure 14 45 is displayed for the airport selected The pilot can enter a different identifier on the Textual METAR Page Figure 14 45 Textual METAR Page Entering an identifier 1 Select the Data Link Page Highlight TEXTUAL METAR and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob and scroll through the list of four letter identifiers 3 Highlight the desired identifier and press the ENT Key 4 The text box displays the METAR data for the selected identifier 5 To request an updated graphic or textual METAR for this airport press the MENU key to access the page menu and select Request METAR 6 The METAR Request Page is displayed The request option is displayed on the Textual METAR Page Displaying Wind Data Displaying wind data on the
111. GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H i RECORD OF REVISIONS Revision Date of Revision Description A 5 00 Initial Release B 5 01 Update to reflect software changes through 2 06 C 4 03 Update to reflect software changes through 4 0 D 2 07 Updated layout added TAWS TERRAIN TIS and Weather information per SW v6 02 E 7 07 Updated per Main SW v6 03 F 6 08 Removed Proximity Advisory info from Section 14 G 09 08 Converted format of figures to accommodate printing process H 12 09 Added Section 14 2 GTS 8XX Traffic Systems GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H ii COPYRIGHT Copyright 2009 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved This manual reflects the operation of Main System Software version 6 03 or later Some differences may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to other software versions Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe Kansas 66062 USA p 913 397 8200 f 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem Oregon 97302 USA p 503 391 3411 f 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 9RB U K p 44 0 0870 8501241 f 44 0 870 8501251 Garmin Asia Corp No 68 Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr Taipei County Taiwan p 886 2 2642 9199 f 886 2 2642 9099 Web S
112. GNS 530 features a digitally tuned VHF COM radio that provides a seamless transition from communication to navigation bringing the two most important functions in flying together in one panel mounted unit The GNS 530 s COM radio operates in the aviation voice band from 118 000 to 136 975 MHz in 25 kHz steps default For European operations a COM radio configuration to allow for 8 33 kHz steps is also provided Section 10 4 Setup Page COM Configuration Volume COM radio volume is adjusted using the COM Power Volume Knob Turn the COM Power Volume Knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease volume Squelch The COM radio features an automatic squelch providing maximum sensitivity to weaker signals while rejecting many localized noise sources The pilot may wish to override this automatic squelch function when listening to a distant station or when setting the desired volume level The COM Power Volume Knob allows the pilot to disable the automatic squelch and keep the COM audio open continuously Overriding the automatic squelch 1 Press the COM Power Volume Knob momentarily 2 Press the COM Power Volume Knob again to return to automatic squelch operation COM Window and Tuning Communication frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby COM frequency field Figure 2 1 using the small and large left knobs to dial in the desired frequency The standby frequency alw
113. Group Bearing To and Distance To GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 9 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES To quickly tune an ARTCC s frequency from the Nearest Center Page 1 Select the Nearest Center Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired ARTCC 4 Turn the large right knob to scroll down the page highlighting the desired frequency 5 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window 6 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency Figure 8 18 Figure 8 18 Frequency Moved to Active Field Selected Frequency Active Frequency Field 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 8 8 NEAREST FLIGHT SERVICE STATION FSS PAGE The Nearest Flight Service Station Page Figure 8 19 displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest FSS points of communication within 200 nm of the present position For each FSS listed the Nearest Flight Service Station Page also indicates one or more frequencies and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the FSS s frequency For duplex operations RX and TX indications appears beside the listed frequencies indicating receive only or transmit only frequencies The associate
114. ION NOTE This section is intended for pilots expe rienced with the operation of the GNS 530 and are familiar with RAIM For more information regarding RAIM see sections 10 3 and 10 4 of this manual FDE is an acronym that stands for Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE was incorporated in the Garmin GNS 530 Main and GPS Software version 3 00 and higher FDE algorithms provide a basis for approval per the requirements for GPS as a Primary Means of Navigation for Oceanic Remote Operations per FAA Notice N8110 60 The oceanic flight phase is used by the GNS 530 when the aircraft is more than 200 nm from the nearest airport FDE requires no pilot interaction during flight but predicting the capability of the GPS constellation to provide service during a flight is done by the pilot prior to departure 15 1 DETECTION AND EXCLUSION FDE consists of two distinct parts fault detection and fault exclusion The detection function refers to the capability to detect a satellite failure which can affect navigation Upon detection the exclusion function excludes one or more failed satellites and prevent them from being used during navigation This allows the GPS to return to normal performance without interruption The process is entirely automated and does not require pilot interaction during flight On the Satellite Status Page the pilot can view information related to FDE operation To enhance safety FDE functionality is provided for o
115. Key again to activate the direct to function Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Activate Field Highlighted When off course while navigating to a waypoint the direct to function may also be used to re center the CDI HSI needle and proceed to the same waypoint Re centering the CDI HSI needle to the same destination waypoint Press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice NOTE When navigating an approach with the missed approach point MAP as the current destination re centering the CDI HSI needle with the Direct to Key cancels the approach GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 2 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Selecting a Destination by Facility Name or City In addition to selecting a destination by identifier the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Figure 4 4 also allows the pilot to select airports VORs and NDBs by facility name or city location If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or city additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob during the selection process See Section 7 1 Duplicate Waypoints for more information Figure 4 4 Select Direct to Waypoint Page Identifier Symbol and Region Facility Name and City Flight Plan Field Nearest Airport Field Selecting a direct to destination by facility name or city 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint iden
116. NAV PAGES 3 10 3 Review Airspace should already be highlighted if not select it with the small right knob Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace Information Page for the selected airspace 4 To display the COM frequency ies for the controlling agency turn the large right knob to highlight Frequencies and press the ENT Key Press the CLR Key to return to the Airspace Information Page 5 Press the CLR Key to exit the Airspace Information Page Map Setup Many of the GNS 530 s functions are menu driven Each of the main pages has an options menu allowing customization of the corresponding page to the pilot s preferences and or selection of special features which specifically relate to that page A Map Page Menu Figure 3 17 provides additional settings to customize the Map Page and additional features related specifically to the Map Page Displaying the Map Page Menu Press the MENU Key with the Map Page displayed Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 Map Page Menu The following options are available Setup Map Measure Dist Data Fields Off Change Fields and Restore Defaults Setup Map allows configuration of the Map Display to individual preferences including map orientation land data enable disable Jeppesen data enable disable automatic zoom airspace boundaries and text size NOTE Large medium and small classifications are used on the GNS
117. NS 530 GNS 530A and GNS 530 A w TAWS models Please note that the difference between the GNS 530 and the GNS 530A models is indicated under VHF COM Performance in the Specifications section of this manual Appendix B NOTE This product its packaging and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like additional information please refer to our website at www garmin com prop65 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H vii WARRANTY AVIATION LIMITED WARRANTY All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase for new Remote Mount and Panel Mount products one year from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly overhauled products six months for newly overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center and 90 days for factory repaired or newly overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair Within the applicable period Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that fail in normal use Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty
118. NT Key Figure 5 26 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window appears listing the available arrivals Figure 5 27 for the destination airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired arrival and press the ENT Key Figure 5 27 Arrivals Window 3 A second window appears listing available transitions Figure 5 28 for the arrival Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key Figure 5 28 Transitions Window 4 With Load highlighted press the ENT Key Selecting a departure for the departure airport 1 Select the Select Departure option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu and press the ENT Key 2 A window appears listing the available departures for the departure airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired departure and press the ENT Key 3 A second window appears listing available transitions for the departure Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key 4 With Load highlighted press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 13 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Removing an approach arrival or departure from the active flight plan 1 Select the Remove Approach Remove Arrival or Remove Departure option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 29 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 29 Active Flight Plan Page
119. OC Window it automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor To select a VOR localizer ILS frequency 1 If the tuning cursor is not currently in the VLOC Window press the small left knob momentarily Figure 9 2 Figure 9 2 Tuning Cursor in VLOC Window Tuning Cursor in VLOC Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 9 2 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 113 portion of the frequency 113 00 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 00 portion of the frequency 113 00 4 To make the standby frequency the active frequency Figure 9 3 press the VLOC Flip flop Key Figure 9 3 Frequency Moved to Active Field Active VLOC Frequency Field VLOC Ident Window VLOC Ident Window Directly below the VLOC Tuning Window is a VLOC Ident Window default setting When the GNS 530 is tuned to a nearby VOR the VLOC Ident Window Figure 9 3 displays the Morse code identifier of the selected station the radial from the VOR and the distance from the VOR When tuned to a nearby localizer the VLOC Ident Window displays the identifier associated airport and runway The VLOC Ident Window
120. OM Window or the VLOC Window This time saving process prevents having to re key a frequency already displayed elsewhere on the screen Selecting a communication or navigation frequency 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor in the GPS Window 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired frequency from the list 3 Press the ENT Key to transfer the selected frequency to the standby field in the COM or VLOC Window COM frequencies automatically go to the standby field of the COM Window and navigation frequencies automatically go to the standby field of the VLOC Window regardless of which window is currently highlighted by the cursor 4 To activate the selected frequency press the COM or VLOC Flip flop Key Displaying frequencies for a different airport along the flight plan 1 Press the small right knob to highlight the airport identifier field 2 Turn the small right knob to display the list of airports within the flight plan Figure 1 22 Figure 1 22 Airport Window 3 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired airport and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 15 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION IFR Procedures Once the direct to or flight plan is confirmed the whole range of instrument procedures is available Departures SIDs arrivals STARs non precision and precision approaches are stored within the NavData ca
121. PL Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the frequency information for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the frequency information for the active flight plan destination airport Selecting an Airport Frequency Page Menu Option 1 With a Flight Plan Active select the Airport Runway Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Runway Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Next FPL Apt or Select Destination Apt and press the ENT Key Figure 7 18 Figure 7 18 Airport Runway Page Menu 4 The Airport Frequency Page displays information regarding the next Flight Plan or Destination Airport 7 5 AIRPORT APPROACH PAGE The Airport Approach Page Figure 7 19 shows the available approach procedures for the selected airport Where multiple initial approach fixes IAFs and feeder routes are available that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each approach and transition To view approach information for a particular airport on the Airport Approach Page enter the airport s identifier per Section 7 1 Figure 7 19 Airport Approach Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Airport
122. PL Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the location information for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the location information for the active flight plan destination airport Selecting an Airport Location Page Menu Option 1 With a Flight Plan active select the Airport Location Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Location Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Next FPL Apt or Select Destination Apt and press the ENT Key Figure 7 8 Figure 7 8 Airport Location Page Menu 4 The Airport Location Page displays information regarding the next Flight Plan or Destination Airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 6 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 3 AIRPORT RUNWAy PAGE The Airport Runway Page Figure 7 9 displays runway designations length surface type and lighting for the selected airport A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Runway Page The map image range appears in the lower left corner and is adjustable using the RNG Key For airports with multiple runways information for each runway is available To view runway information for a particular airport on the Airport Runway Page enter the airport s identifi
123. Page Press and hold the CLR Key Selecting the desired NAV Page Turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 11 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Map Page After the GNS 530 acquires satellites and computes a position the Map Page Figure 1 15 appears automatically Figure 1 15 Map Page Present Position Desired Track Map Range Map Display Data Fields The Map Page displays the present position using an airplane symbol relative to nearby airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints and airspace boundaries The route is displayed as a solid line Optional data fields for destination waypoint WPT desired track DTK track TRK distance to waypoint DIS and ground speed GS appear on the right hand side of the display These fields are user selectable Section 3 4 Selecting Desired On screen Data to allow the pilot to configure the unit Available settings include altitude bearing enroute safe altitude estimated time of arrival minimum safe altitude and ground track A Map Setup Page is provided to designate the maximum range at which each map feature appears These settings provide an automatic decluttering of the map based upon preferences while adjusting the range See Section 16 3 for definitions of these navigation terms While viewing the Map Page the pilot can quickly declutter and remove m
124. Refer to Section 10 4 for specific information regarding RAIM protection limits also refer to Section 15 for FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion information Utility Page Software Versions The Software Versions Page Figure 10 25 displays software version information for each of the various subsystems contained within the GNS 530 This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 25 Software Versions Page Utility Page Database Versions The Database Versions Page Figure 10 26 displays the navigation database type and version information as well as the land database type and version This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 26 Database Versions Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 18 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Utility Page Terrain Database Versions The Terrain Database Versions Page Figure 10 27 displays the current version and area of coverage of each terrain and obstacle database This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page Figure 10 27 Terrain Database Versions Page 10 4 SETUP PAGE The Setup Page Figure 10 28 provides access via menu options to airspace alarms CDI scale adjustment an arrival alarm units of measure settings position formats map datums and settings for local or UTC time display When a m
125. Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 10 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 4 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data option Press the ENT Key when finished 5 For a stored flight plan Flight Plan data option the flight plan number field is highlighted Turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 6 For a specified user waypoint User Waypoint data option the waypoint identifier field is highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired user waypoint Press the ENT Key when finished 7 The flashing cursor moves to the CROSS SIDE field Turn the small right knob to select To or From and press the ENT Key 8 The flashing cursor moves to the Initiate Transfer confirmation field Press the ENT Key to transfer the selected data 10 3 UTILITy PAGE The Utility Page Figure 10 15 provides access via menu options to checklists a count down up timer trip timers trip statistics RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring prediction software versions database versions and terrain database version information When a menu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features NOTE Scroll down to view the last 3 items Software Versions Database Versions and Terrain Database Versions listed on the Utility Page Figure 10 15 Utility Page
126. S alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages Alert Type TAWS Page Annunciation Pop Up Alert Aural Message Excessive Descent Rate EDR Warning Pull Up Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC Warning or Terrain Terrain Pull Up Pull Up or Terrain Ahead Pull Up Terrain Ahead Pull Up Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Warning or Terrain Ahead Pull Up Terrain Ahead Pull Up or Terrain Terrain Pull Up Pull Up Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Warning or Obstacle Obstacle Pull Up Pull Up or Obstacle Ahead Pull Up Obstacle Ahead Pull Up Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Warning or Obstacle Ahead Pull Up Obstacle Ahead Pull Up or Obstacle Obstacle Pull Up Pull Up Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC Caution or Caution Terrain Caution Terrain or Terrain Ahead Terrain Ahead Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Caution or Terrain Ahead Terrain Ahead or Caution Terrain Caution Terrain Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Caution or Caution Obstacle Caution Obstacle or Obstacle Ahead Obstacle Ahead Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Caution or Obstacle Ahead Obstacle Ahead or Caution Obstacle Caution Obstacle Premature Descent Alert PDA Cautio
127. Type BRG Bearing CTS Course To Steer DIS Distance DTK Desired Track ESA Enroute Safe Altitude ETA Estimated Time of Arrival FLOW Total Fuel Flow GS Ground Speed MSA Minimum Safe Altitude TKE Track Angle Error TRK Track VSR Vertical Speed Required WPT Active Waypoint XTK Cross Track Error Table 10 3 5 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor and return to the Setup Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 29 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup Page COM Configuration Setting the COM channel spacing 1 Select COM Configuration from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the channel spacing field Figure 10 44 Turn the small right knob to select the desired channel spacing 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 44 Channel Spacing Window Restoring Factory Settings When making changes to any Setup Page option a Restore Defaults menu selection allows the pilot to restore the original factory settings for the selected option only For example with the CDI Alarms Page displayed the Restore Defaults option restores all airspace alarms and CDI settings to the original factory values Restoring a Setup Page option to the origi nal factory settings 1 Select the desired menu option from the Setup Page using the steps
128. When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 026 appears in the lower right corner Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP 11 After crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW04 the runway threshold see Figure 6 20 Fly toward the MAP Figure 6 20 Sequence to MAP NOTE When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP The dashed line is provided for situational awareness only and should NOT be used for navigation Follow the published missed approach procedures 12 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 13 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 21 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined beginning on the following page Figure 6 21 SUSP Annunciation Flying the Missed Approach After passing the MAP if the runway isn t in sight the pilot must execute a missed approach The GNS 530 continues to give guidanc
129. With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the selected user waypoint User Waypoint List The User Waypoint List Figure 7 46 allows the pilot to review modify rename or delete a selected user waypoint or to delete all user waypoints currently stored in memory The top of the page shows the number of waypoints used and available memory Reviewing and or modifying a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint Figure 7 46 Figure 7 46 User Waypoint List Page 3 Press the ENT Key to display the User Waypoint Page for the selected waypoint From this page the pilot may review all information defining the waypoint and its position 4 To modify the waypoint s position or reference waypoint information follow the preceding steps described in this section 5 To exit the User Waypoint Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 24 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Renaming a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Use the small and large right knobs to change the name of the user waypoint Figure 7 47 Enter the new name directly ov
130. a specific airport from the Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Move the target pointer to highlight a desired airport Graphical METAR data is displayed for that airport in a thumbnail image NOTE For the GDL 69 69A METAR data is automatically updated every twelve minutes from the time of initial request GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 31 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Weather Legend Page The symbology unique to Graphical METAR Winds and Temperature Dewpoint data is displayed on the Weather Legend Page The Weather Legend is accessed from the Weather Page NOTE All METAR Wind and Temp Dewpoint symbols are depicted at the end of this section Displaying the Weather Legend 1 Select the Weather Page and activate the cursor This selects the weather selection field in the upper left corner of page 2 Use the small right knob to select METAR WINDS or TEMP DP 3 Press the MENU Key The Weather Page Menu is displayed 4 Turn the small right knob highlight Display Legend and press the ENT Key The Weather Legend is displayed Figure 14 44 for the type of data that was selected Use the small right knob and scroll through the various descriptions for the symbols that are shown Press the small right knob to return to the Weather Page Figure 14 44 Weather Legend Page for METAR Data The following symbology is shown for the various types of data
131. a request radius from 50 to 250 nautical miles from the selected position Position also WPT or Flight Plan Current Posn Position is current Look Ahead Position is look ahead position From ID Position is from the ID entered into the WPT field Flight Plan is the ID selected from the active flight plan Auto Request GDL 49 Only This field is used to set the time interval for the GDL 49 to automatically send a NEXRAD data request The time options are OFF 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hour When an auto request time is selected the first request is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a request NOTE It is recommended that the pilot turn the Auto Request function on by setting it to 10 min updates This setting provides best performance for the GDL 49 The Manual Send GDL 49 or Update Request GDL 69 field is used to request METAR Data 4 Use the small and large right knobs to select the desired data and the ENT Key to enter the data into the appropriate fields on the METAR Request Page 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the NEXRAD Request Page press the sm
132. a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft s projected path ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TERRAIN Page The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Table 12 4 During the final approach phase of flight FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 nm of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the runway threshold Phase of Flight Minimum Clearance Altitude Level Flight ft Minimum Clearance Altitude Descending ft Enroute 700 500 Terminal 350 300 Approach 150 100 Departure 100 100 Table 12 4 Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values for FLTA Alerts GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 7 SECTION 12 TERRAIN Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert PDA is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway Figure 12 5 PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport PDA alerting ends when the aircraft is either 0 5 nm from the runway threshold OR at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the threshold 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 Height Above Terrain Feet Distance From Destination Airport nm 1 2
133. acles and potential impact points on the TAWS Page Red Symbol Terrain Obstacle is above or within 100 feet below the aircraft altitude Yellow Symbol Terrain Obstacle is between 100 feet and 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude Black Symbol Terrain Obstacle is more than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude NOTE Obstacle symbols are shown on display zoom ranges up to 10 nm Unlighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Unlighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Potential Impact Points Figure 3 41 TAWS Symbols NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 21 3 7 NAV COM PAGE The NAV COM navigation communications Page Figure 3 35 provides a list of the airport communication and navigation frequencies at the departure enroute and arrival airports The NAV COM Page makes selection of the frequencies needed along the flight plan quick and convenient If there is no active flight plan with a departure airport the NAV COM Page displays the frequencies for the airport nearest the departure position Figure 3 42 NAV COM Page Departure Enroute or Arrival Airport Assigned Frequency and Usage Information
134. active approach is not a GPS approved approach Verify that the VLOC receiver is tuned to the proper frequency and press the CDI Key to display VLOC directly above the CDI Key Set course to The course select for the external CDI or HSI should be set to the specified course The message only occurs when the current selected course is greater than 10 different from the desired track Steep turn ahead This message appears approximately one minute prior to a turn in one of the following three conditions 1 the turn requires a bank angle in excess of 25 in order to stay on course 2 the turn requires a course change greater than 175 or 3 during a DME arc approach the turn anticipation distance exceeds 90 seconds Stored data was lost All user waypoints flight plans and system settings have been lost due to a memory battery failure or system reset Terrain See Section 12 3 and 13 3 for complete lists of TAWS and TERRAIN related Alerts and Annunciations Terrain configuration conflict The hardware configuration does not match the terrain software configuration The operational status of the terrain components is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service Terrain configuration has changed The software has detected a change in the terrain configuration Terrain has failed The terrain functionality self test has failed The operational status of the terrain compon
135. actual desired track DTK depends on ground speed and distance from HFD VOR GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 25 Figure 6 59 Waypoint Alert 4 When the OBS Key is pressed the GNS 530 automatically sequences to each waypoint along the remainder of the departure route including the selected transition 6 3 ILS APPROACHES Precision approaches can be performed with the GNS 530 s built in VLOC VOR localizer glideslope receivers The GPS receiver can be used for guidance prior to reaching the final approach fix but once there the proper frequency must be selected on the VLOC Window left side of screen and the CDI output set to VLOC The GNS 530 can be set to automatically switch the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC Figure 6 60 as the pilot intercepts the final approach course When the ILS approach is activated the GNS 530 automatically switches within 1 2 nm left or right of the final approach course This switch can take place anywhere from 2 0 to 15 0 nm from the FAF Figure 6 60 GPS and VLOC Annunciations Figure 6 61 shows multiple locations along the approach path and the expected CDI selection GPS or VLOC The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should occur within the area of the shaded box The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC occurs gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot The CDI selection can also be ch
136. again Data transfer cancelled data invalid An attempt to transfer a single user waypoint during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled No waypoint was specified on the Crossfill Page Select a user waypoint and attempt the transfer again Data transfer cancelled version mismatch An attempt to transfer data during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled The database versions of the two 500 Series units are not identical If necessary update the database s so they match Contact Jeppesen or your Garmin dealer for assistance Data transfer error please re transmit An error was detected during unit to unit crossfill of user data user waypoints and or flight plans The data transfer should be attempted again Data transfer is complete The unit to unit crossfill of user waypoint data has finished Database changed validate user modified procedures One or more approaches departures or arrivals have been modified from their original published form When the NavData card is replaced database update the changes in the new database must be manually verified This message occurs each time a flight plan containing a modified procedure generated from a prior database version is activated To eliminate the message re create the flight plan from the new database then make the desired modifications Degraded accuracy GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available Poor satellite geometry or covera
137. age GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 10 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Highlighting TIS Traffic Using Map Page Panning Another Map Page feature is panning which allows the pilot to move the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale Press the small right knob to select the panning function a target pointer flashes on the map display A window appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from the present position Activating the panning feature and panning the map display 1 Press the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer 2 Turn the small right knob to move up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise 3 Turn the large right knob to move right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on traffic the traffic range and altitude separation are displayed Figure 14 18 Figure 14 18 Traffic Range and Altitude Separation Traffic Range and Altitude Separation Target Pointer Power Up Test The TIS interface performs an automatic test during power up If the system passes the power up test the Standby Screen appears on the Traffic Page If the system passes the power up test and the air
138. ained in the Obstacle Database Database Versions The version and area of coverage of each terrain obstacle database is shown on the Terrain Database Versions Page located in the AUX Page Group Figures 13 12 and 13 13 also Section 10 3 Databases are checked for integrity at power up If a database is found to be missing and or deficient the TAWS system fails the self test and displays the TAWS system failure message see Table 13 3 Figure 13 12 Utility Page Figure 13 13 Terrain Database Versions Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 12 SECTION 13 TAWS Database Updates Terrain obstacle databases are updated periodically with the latest terrain and obstacle data Visit the Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain obstacle da tabases compare database cycle numbers to determine if a newer version is available Updated terrain data cards may be obtained by calling Garmin at one of the numbers listed in the front of this document Updating terrain obstacle databases 1 Acquire a new terrain data card from Garmin 2 Turn off the power to the GNS 530 3 Remove the old terrain data card from and insert the new card into the right most slot of the 500 Series unit 4 Turn on the GNS 530 and verify that the TAWS system passes self test Terrain Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage Table 13 5 lists the area of coverage available in each database Regional
139. all and large right knobs to enter the desired figure Figure 1 7 and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 7 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Figure 1 7 Fuel Flow Selected The Instrument Panel Self test Page includes selections to set fuel on board to full capacity and access the Checklists Page This allows the pilot to quickly set fuel to full limits and display any checklists that have been entered such as start up or takeoff checklists Setting fuel on board to full if not provided by sensor 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Set Full Fuel Figure 1 8 Figure 1 8 Set Full Fuel Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key and verify that fuel on board now matches the fuel capacity figure Fuel on board is reduced over time based on the fuel flow figure Viewing the Checklists Page 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Go To Chklist Figure 1 9 and press the ENT Key Figure 1 9 Go To Chklist Highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist then execute each step Section 10 3 Utility Page Checklists in the selected checklist 3 Once the pilot completes the desired checklist s press the small right knob to return to the Checklists Page Press the small right knob again to return to normal operation on the Satellite Status Page or the Map Page 4 Once instrument operation has been verified with the I
140. all right knob The Data Link Page is displayed GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 30 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Requesting graphical or textual METARS from the Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key The Map Page Options Menu is displayed Figure 14 43 Figure 14 43 Map Page Menu 3 Select Request METAR and press the ENT Key The METAR Request Page is displayed There are four user selectable parameter fields Format Center Radius and Position see preceding pages for detailed information Change the request parameters as desired 4 Enter the type of desired METAR Data and the desired radius graphical requests only 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the METAR Request Page press the small right knob The Map Page is displayed Displaying graphical METARS on the NAV Weather Page Once received graphical METAR data is displayed on the NAV Weather Page Displaying graphical METARS on the NAV Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn small right knob and select METAR 4 Press the small right knob Viewing graphical METAR Data for
141. an 00 and overwrites any previous information at that location Activating an existing flight plan 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Flight Plan and press the ENT Key Figure 5 10 Figure 5 10 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Inverting Flight Plans After travelling along a flight plan the pilot may wish to reverse the route for navigation guidance back to the original departure point Activating an existing flight plan in reverse order 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Invert amp Activate FPL Figure 5 11 and press the ENT Key The original flight plan remains intact in its flight plan catalog storage location Figure 5 11 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 5 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Copying Flight Plans To save a flight plan currently located in flight plan 00 copy it to an open catalog location 1 19 before the flight plan is cancelled overwritten
142. an provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions Detailed alert modes are described later in this section Baro Corrected Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The most accurate baro corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual atmosphere conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude as read from the altimeter to differ from the GPS MSL altitude This variation results in the aircraft s true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude Using TAWS During power up the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot At the same time TAWS self test begins One of the following aural messages is generated TAWS System Test OK TAWS System Failure A test failure is also annunciated for TAWS as shown in Table 13 4 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 3 SECTION 13 TAWS 13 2 TAWS PAGE See Section 3 6 for a complete description of the TAWS Page and its operation TAWS Symbols The symbols and colors in Figure 13 1 and
143. and press the ENT Key Pressing the CLR Key when the TERRAIN Page is displayed can also be used to toggle aviation information on or off Figure 3 30 TERRAIN Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 17 Inhibit Mode TERRAIN has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TERRAIN and always remember to enable the system when appropriate For more information see Section 12 3 TERRAIN alerts Inhibiting TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figure 3 31 Figure 3 31 TERRAIN Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the annunciator field when TERRAIN is inhibited Figure 3 32 Annunciator Field Figure 3 32 TERRAIN Annunciator Field Enabling TERRAIN 1 Select the TERRAIN Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TERRAIN system is functional again TERRAIN Symbols NOTE See Section 12 2 for a complete description of TERRAIN symbology The following symbols Figure 3 33 are used to represent obstacles and potential impact points on the TERRAIN Page Red Symbol Terrain Obstacle is above or within 100 feet below the aircraft altitude Yellow Symbol Terrain Obstacle is between 100 feet and 1000
144. anged manually by pressing the CDI Key Once the switch from GPS to VLOC has occurred either automatically or manually it does not automatically switch again until the approach is reactivated or another approach is selected To prevent automatic ILS CDI selection choose the Manual ILS CDI setting as described in Section 10 4 CDI Scale Alarms The factory default setting is Auto which enables the automatic switch to VLOC GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 26 NOTE When intercepting the approach course at a distance less than 2 0 nm from the FAF the GNS 530 does not automatically switch the CDI to VLOC In this case press the CDI Key to manually switch from GPS to VLOC 2NM 15NM 1 2NM 1 2NM MANUAL FAF VLOC VLOC GPS GPS Figure 6 61 ILS Approach Selecting an ILS Approach This example uses a flight from Laughlin Bullhead Arizona International to Flagstaff Pulliam KFLG and selects the ILS runway 21 approach SHUTR intersection is selected as the IAF which includes an outbound leg and a procedure turn Of course vectors to final could also be selected as previously described for the non precision approach examples refer to Figure 6 62 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Flagstaff AZ Pulliam ILS DME Rwy 21 Figure 6 62 ILS Approach Flagstaff GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Referen
145. anic enroute and terminal phases of flight RAIM is available nearly 100 of the time Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches there may be times when RAIM is not available The GNS 530 automatically monitors RAIM and warns the pilot with an alert message Section 15 when it is not available and the INTEG annunciator appears at the bottom left corner of the screen If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure The GNS 530 s RAIM prediction function Section 15 also allows the pilot to see whether RAIM is available for a specified date and time NOTE If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course the approach does not become active as indicated by an Approach is not active message a RAIM not available from FAF to MAP message and INTEG annunciator Why aren t there any approaches available for my flight plan Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct to keep in mind that some VOR VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers If a destination airport does not have a GPS approach the GNS 530 indicates NONE for the available procedures as listed on the Airport Approach Page Figure C 1 For more information on selecting an approach see Section 6 1 Figure C 1 Airport Approach Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C
146. any of the background map details by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly until the desired detail is depicted To change the map range press the up arrow to zoom out or the down arrow to zoom in of the RNG map range Key The current map range is depicted in the lower left corner of the Map Display Direct to Navigation The GNS 530 can use direct point to point navigation to provide guidance from takeoff to touchdown even in the IFR environment Once a destination is selected the unit provides speed course and distance data based upon a direct course from the present position to the destination A destination can be selected from any page with the Direct to Key Selecting a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the destination field highlighted 2 Turn the small right knob to enter the first letter of the destination waypoint identifier The destination waypoint may be an airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as long as it is in the database or stored in memory as a user waypoint 3 Turn the large right knob to the right to move the cursor to the next character position GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 12 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of the waypoint identifier Figure 1 16 Figure 1 16 Direct to Waypoint Page 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the identifie
147. approach GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 6 Flying the Procedure Turn Figure 6 12 Sample Approach with Procedure Turn 4 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 12 for the following steps 1 Within 30 nm of the destination airport the GNS 530 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode as indicated in the lower left corner of the screen Figure 6 13 The switch to terminal mode is accompanied by a gradual Course Deviation Indicator CDI scale transition from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 13 Terminal Annunciator 2 Several miles prior to reaching the IAF LYH the pilot may wish to review the approach sequence Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Press the small right knob and then turn the large right knob to review each segment of the approach Figure 6 14 When finished press the FPL Key again to return to the previous page Figure 6 14 Active Flight Plan Page 3 When approaching the IAF LYH a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 205 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 15 As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 205 Dial the outbound course of 205 into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob Figure 6 15 Waypoint Alert GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev
148. ater Lighting Runway lighting types include No Lights Part Time Full Time Unknown or Frequency for pilot controlled lighting Airport Runway Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Runway Page by pressing the MENU Key Select Next FPL Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the runway information for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the runway information for the active flight plan destination airport Selecting an Airport Runway Page Menu Option 1 With a Flight Plan Active select the Airport Runway Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Runway Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Next FPL Apt or Select Destination Apt and press the ENT Key Figure 7 12 Figure 7 12 Airport Runway Page Menu 4 The Airport Runway Page displays information regarding the next Flight Plan or Destination Airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 8 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 4 AIRPORT FREQUENCy PAGE The Airport Frequency Page displays radio frequencies and frequency types for the selected airport as well as sector and altitude restrictions where applicable If the selected airport has a localizer based approach the localiz
149. ation Some earlier units are not equipped to support the TERRAIN and or TAWS functionality so therefore will not have a TERRAIN or TAWS page available TERRAIN Page To display the TERRAIN Page select the NAV Page Group and turn the small right knob until the TERRAIN Page is displayed Figure 3 27 The TERRAIN Page displays GPS derived MSL altitude in increments of 20 feet or 10 meters depending on unit configura tion The G to right of the MSL altitude display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS derived Aircraft ground track Terrain Range Indicates the terrain elevation in colors relative to the aircraft altitude Range marking rings 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50 nm and 100 nm Heading Indicator The heading indication on the TERRAIN Page always displays TRK for Track up unless there is no valid heading Obstacles Potential Impact Points NOTE See Section 12 for a full description of TERRAIN functions Selectable Display Settings The TERRAIN Page has two selectable view settings 360 View View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on all sides Figure 3 27 120 View View of terrain ahead of and 60 to either side of the aircraft flight path TERRAIN Page Indication Figure 3 27 TERRAIN Page GPS derived MSL Altitude Red Terrain Warning Terrain Above or Within 100 Below Aircraft Altitude
150. ations Transceiver CRSR Cursor CTA ICAO Control Area CTAF Common Traffic Advisory Frequency CTR Center ARTCC CTS Course To Steer CUM Cumulative DB Database DEN Density DEP Departure DIS Distance DME Distance Measuring Equipment DOP Dilution of Precision DTK Desired Track EFF Efficiency ELEV Elevation ENDUR Endurance ENR Enroute ENT Enter EPE Estimated Position Error ESA Enroute Safe Altitude ETA Estimated Time of Arrival ETE Estimated Time Enroute F Degrees Fahrenheit FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion FF Fuel Flow FLOW Total Fuel Flow FOB Fuel On Board FPL Flight Plan fpm Feet Per Minute FREQ Frequency FSS Flight Service Station GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 10 ft Feet G S Glideslope gl Gallons GPS Global Positioning System GS Ground Speed HDG Heading hg Inches of Mercury HUL Horizontal Uncertainty Level HWY Highway ID Identifier ig Imperial Gallons ILS Instrument Landing System IND Indicated INT Intersection INTEG Integrity kg Kilograms kHz Kilohertz km Kilometers kph Kilometers Per Hour kt Knots LAT LON Latitude Longitude lb Pounds LCL Local LFOB Left over Fuel On Board LOC Localizer LRES Left over Fuel Reserve Time Lrg Large lt Liters
151. aw METAR text Textual or requesting a graphical summary Graphic of several METARS NOTE Textual METARS can only be requested by identifier or by flight plan if the flight plan contains a METAR station identifier Center This field allows the pilot to specify reference points for the request The following five options are available for the Center field Current Position Request METAR data from the aircraft s current position Look Ahead Request METAR data ahead of along the current route From ID Request NEXRAD data from a specific waypoint identifier If From ID is selected as the reference point for the request the WPT field is displayed in place of Position The WPT field is used to enter a waypoint identifier as the reference point for the request From Lat Lon Request NEXRAD data from a specific latitude and longitude This is only selectable when requesting from the map The Position field displays the position of the map cursor and cannot be edited From Flight Plan Request METAR data from one of the waypoints in the active flight plan This is only selectable when an active Flight Plan has been selected The Flight Plan field displayed in place of Position is used to select which waypoint in the active flight plan to use as the reference point for the request Radius Graphical requests only This field selects
152. aware that traffic may be present but not shown Figure 14 11 Traffic Removed Banner Traffic Removed Banner and Age Indicator UNAVAIL When a 60 second period elapses with no data TIS is considered to be unavailable This state is indicated by the text UNAVAIL Figure 14 12 The pilot should be aware that UNAVAIL could indicate a TIS coverage limitation due to a line of sight situation a low altitude condition or a result of flying directly over the radar site providing coverage cone of silence Figure 14 12 UNAVAIL Message Traffic Warning Window When the unit is on any page other than the NAV Traffic Page and a traffic threat is imminent the Traffic Warning Window is displayed Figure 14 13 The Traffic Warning Window shows a small thumbnail map which can take the user to the Traffic Page by pressing the ENT Key or go back to the previous page by pressing the CLR Key Figure 14 13 Traffic Warning Window NOTE The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed is less than 30 knots or when an approach is active GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 8 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Non Bearing Traffic Advisory TA Banner Traffic is only displayed graphically if aircraft heading data is available When heading is not available Traffic Advisories are displayed as non bearing banners The banner shown in Figure 14 14 consist
153. aypoint with an invalid name The GNS 530 does not allow spaces between characters in the waypoint name MAIN processor requires service The GNS 530 has detected a failure in the main system processor The GNS 530 is not usable and should be taken to a Garmin dealer for service Memory battery low The internal battery that sustains user memory is low and should be replaced by a Garmin dealer as soon as possible Failure to do so may result in loss of stored data including flight plans user waypoints unit settings and satellite data Near airspace less than 2 nm The GPS calculated position is within 2 nm of a special use airspace boundary but the aircraft is not projected to enter the airspace This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Need altitude display position page The GPS receiver needs altitude input in order to start and or continue 2D navigation Select the Position Page and verify the altitude reading If the altitude is in error by more than 500 feet enter the current altitude as accurately as possible An inaccurate altitude directly translate into inaccurate position information No altitude input is being received No altitude data is being received from RS 232 Serializer Icarus Rosetta or Shadin or grey code inputs If the problem persists contact a Garmin dealer and check the installation and installation settings When this message
154. ays appears below the active frequency The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for transmit and receive operations Figure 2 1 RX Receive Indication RX Receive Indication Standby COM Frequency Field Active COM Frequency Field A frequency may also be quickly selected from the database by simply highlighting the desired frequency on any of the main pages and pressing the ENT Key This process is referred to as auto tuning Once a frequency is selected in the standby field it may be transferred to the active frequency by pressing the COM Flip flop Key While receiving a station an RX indication Figure 2 1 appears in the upper right corner of the COM Window to the immediate right of COM A TX indication appears at this location when transmitting Figure 2 2 TX Transmit Indication Figure 2 2 TX Transmit Indication GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 2 SECTION 2 COM NOTE The tuning cursor normally appears in the COM Window unless placed in the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob When the tuning cursor is in the VLOC Window it automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity Selecting a COM frequency 1 If the tuning cursor is not currently in the COM Window press the small left knob momentarily Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Standby Frequency of 135 325 2 Turn the large left knob to se
155. ble data fields along the right hand side of the screen Select this option to display additional on screen data such as destination waypoint name WPT desired track DTK groundtrack TRK distance to destination DIS and ground speed GS If this option has been selected and the data fields are being displayed Data Fields Off appears as an option instead Figure 3 23 Map Display with Data Fields On To turn the data fields off on From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Data Fields On or Data Fields Off and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 14 Clearing On Screen Weather Data Clear Storm Data removes storm history information from the map New storm data appears as detected and relayed by a connected weather data source Weather data and the Clear Storm Data option are only available when the GNS 530 installation includes connection to weather information sources See the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 or Section 14 of this Pilot s Guide Selecting Desired On Screen Data Change Fields allows selection of the data displayed on the five user selectable data fields along the right hand side of the Map Page There are sixteen available data types including bearing to destination distance to destination estimated time of arrival ground s
156. borne the Traffic Page is displayed on the 6 nm display range and in the normal altitude display mode If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft does not have a squat switch the Standby Screen is displayed Figure 14 20 If the GTS 8XX fails the power up test as indicated by a FAILED screen the GTS 8XX is inoperable see the GTS 8XX Installation Manual for detailed information on Failure Response NOTE The FAILED message is displayed when the system detects an error that prohibits further traffic display operation NOTE When the system is in standby the GTS 8XX does not transmit interrogate or track intruder aircraft Figure 14 20 Standby Mode User initiated Test In addition to the power up test the GTS 8XX performs self tests during normal operation A self test is performed once per minute to verify that the antenna is connected Also a calibration is performed at varying intervals based on time and temperature A user initiated test of the GTS 8XX interface can also be performed The test criteria are identical to the power up self test although the user initiated test is concluded by an aural pass fail message NOTE A user initiated test can only be performed when in standby or failed mode Performing a user initiated test 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Traffic Page 2 From the Traffic Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small ri
157. bstacles and potential impact points on the TERRAIN Page TERRAIN uses yellow caution and red warning to depict terrain information relative to aircraft altitude Each color is associated with an alert severity level Terrain graphics and visual annunciations also use these color assignments Potential Impact Point Unlighted Obstacle Projected Flight Path 1000 ft 100 ft Threshold Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Yellow Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude Red Figure 12 1 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Potential Impact Points Obstacle Location Alert Level lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL Obstacle Symbol Obstacle above or within 100 below current aircraft altitude WARNING Red Obstacle between 100 and 1000 below current aircraft altitude CAUTION Yellow Table 12 1 Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 4 SECTION 12 TERRAIN 12 3 TERRAIN ALERTS TERRAIN Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TERRAIN soft
158. c display of traffic advisory information in the cockpit for non TCAS equipped aircraft TIS is a ground based service providing relative location of aircraft tracked by ATC radar within a specified service volume The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to generate traffic notification TIS Traffic display is available to aircraft equipped with a Mode S Data Link such as the Garmin GTX 330 Transponder TIS traffic information from a GTX 330 Transponder can then be displayed on a GNS 530 unit Surveillance data includes aircraft tracked by ATC radar within the coverage volume Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 2 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TIS displays up to eight traffic targets within 7 nautical miles horizontally from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft Figure 14 1 Figure 14 1 TIS Coverage Volume 7 0 nm 3 500 ft 3 000 ft Not to Scale TIS Operational Procedures TIS warns the user with voice and visual traffic advisories when it predicts an intruder to be a threat The user should not start evasive maneuvers using information from the GNS 530 display or on a traffic advisory only The display and advisories are intended only for assistance in visually locating the traffic due to the lack in resolution and coordination ability The flight crew should attempt to visually acquire the i
159. catalog 1 19 1 20 5 1 5 9 6 4 Flight timers 10 14 10 15 Forecast Abbreviations 14 35 FPL Key 1 4 Frequency fields 1 3 1 9 1 13 1 14 1 16 1 17 1 18 2 1 2 5 3 10 3 21 3 22 6 2 6 5 6 25 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 33 7 8 7 9 7 11 7 16 7 17 8 7 8 9 8 10 8 13 9 1 9 4 16 6 16 7 Frequency selection 9 1 Fuel planning 10 1 10 4 Full Screen Map 3 13 G GDL 49 14 19 GDL 69 69A 14 19 Generic timer 10 14 10 15 GPS v GPS receiver status 3 23 GPS Window 1 9 Ground speed 1 11 1 12 3 4 3 7 3 14 3 23 6 23 6 24 10 2 10 3 10 5 10 6 10 11 10 15 10 16 16 13 Ground track 1 11 3 4 16 13 Gust Offset Graphics 14 37 H HOLD 6 9 6 11 6 23 Hold in an approach 6 9 6 22 C 3 Holding pattern 5 15 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 23 C 3 I Ident Audio 9 1 IFR Procedures 1 15 ILS approach 6 25 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 33 9 3 Insert the NavData card A 1 Instrument Panel Self Test Page 1 6 INTEG annunciator C 1 Intersections 1 11 1 16 7 1 8 1 8 2 8 5 Inverting Flight Plans 5 4 IOI imminent obstacle impact 12 5 13 5 ITI imminent terrain impact 12 5 K Keys and Knobs 1 2 1 3 Key and Knob Functions 1 2 L Land data 1 5 3 10 3 12 16 5 Land data page 1 5 Large right knob 1 3 Left hand Keys and Knobs 1 3 Loading an approach C 2 Local time 10 20 10 26 Locked waypoints 16 2 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 3 INDEX M Magnetic variation 10 20 10 24 Magne
160. ce 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 27 1 Select Flagstaff Pulliam KFLG as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC Figure 6 63 Key and select the ILS 21 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 Figure 6 63 Procedures Page 3 From the Transitions Window select SHUTR as the IAF Figure 6 64 Also select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach Figure 6 64 Transitions Window 4 A reminder message appears indicating that GPS can only be used for approach monitoring As mentioned the VLOC receiver must be used for this approach Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message When an ILS approach is loaded or activated the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the standby field of the VLOC Window To use this frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key to place it in the active frequency field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 28 Flying the ILS Approach When Activate is selected for an ILS approach automatic switching of the external CDI is enabled unless turned off from the CDI Alarms Page Once established on the inbound course to the FAF the external CDI guidance automatically switches from GPS shown in green text to VLOC shown in white text If the pilot has forgotten to activate the ILS frequency
161. ce 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 14 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Copying a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed and the desired checklist selected press the MENU Key 2 Turn the large right knob to select Copy Checklist and press the ENT Key to copy the checklist to an empty checklist memory location Sorting the checklists by name or entry 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press the MENU Key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select Sort List By Entry or Sort List By Name and press the ENT Key Utility Page Flight Timers Viewing using or resetting the generic timer 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 2 The flashing cursor highlights Start To start the generic timer press the ENT Key Count up timers typically begin with this step however for count down timers to enter a count direction and time before starting the timer see the following steps 3 To change the count direction turn the large right knob to highlight the count direction field Figure 10 20 Down or Up Turn the small right knob to select the desired count direction Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 20 Count Window 4 For a count down timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the count down time in h
162. ceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list Figure 8 4 Figure 8 4 Nearest ARTCC Page 4 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 3 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with the GNS 530 s direct to function to quickly set a course to a nearby facility and can provide navigation to the nearest airport in case of an in flight emergency Selecting a nearby airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as a direct to destination 1 Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST page list Figure 8 5 and highlight the desired nearest waypoint as outlined in Section 8 1 Figure 8 5 Nearest Airport Page 2 Press the Direct to Key to display the select Direct to Waypoint Page 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected waypoint s identifier and press the ENT Key a second time with Activate highlighted to begin navigating to the selected waypoint 8 2 NEAREST AIRPORT PAGE The Nearest Airport Page displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest airports within 200 nm of the present position For each airport listed the Nearest Airport Page also indicates the best available approach common traffic advisory frequency CTAF and the length of t
163. computes altitude using satellite data Poor Coverg The GPS receiver cannot acquire sufficient satellites for navigation Rcvr Not Usbl The GPS receiver is unusable due to incorrect initialization or abnormal satellite conditions Turn the unit off and on again AutoLocate The GPS receiver is looking for any available satellite This process can take up to five minutes to determine a position Table 3 4 GPS Receiver Status Messages GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 1 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION 4 1 OVERVIEW The GNS 530 s direct to function provides a quick method of setting a course to a destination waypoint Once a direct to is activated the GNS 530 establishes a point to point course line great circle from the present position to the selected direct to destination Navigation data on the various NAV pages provides steering guidance until the direct to is cancelled or replaced by a new destination Selecting a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears Figure 4 1 with the waypoint identifier field highlighted Figure 4 1 Select Direct to Waypoint Page 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired destination waypoint Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 Waypoint Identifier Field Selected 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT
164. craft is airborne as determined by system configuration at the time of installation see the installer for detailed criteria information traffic is displayable on the Traffic Page in operating mode If the system fails the power up test one of the messages listed in Table 14 3 will be displayed See the installer for corrective action if the DATA FAIL or FAILED message is displayed Message Description FAILED GTX 330 has failed DATA FAIL Data is being received from the GTX 330 but a failure was detected in the data stream NO DATA Data is not being received from the GTX 330 Table 14 3 Power up Messages NOTE NO DATA may be a normal mode of operation in a dual transponder installation where the GTX 330 with TIS is not the selected transponder GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 11 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Manual Override The user can manually switch between standby STBY and operating OPER mode of operation to manually override automatic operation Placing the display into operating mode from the standby mode to display TIS traffic 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight STBY 2 Turn the small right knob to select OPER 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm Placing the display into standby mode from operating mode to stop displaying TIS traffic 1 Press the small right knob to activate
165. d as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS alert NOTE Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map covering the U S NOTE This Section assumes the user has experience operating the GNS 530 and the Garmin GTX 330 Transponder NOTE TIS and Weather Data Link displays are available only when GNS 530 units are configured with the GTX 330 Mode S Transponder and a GDL 49 or GDL 69 A Data Link Satellite Receiver NOTE Proximity Advisories and Other Traffic symbols normally displayed in white may be displayed in cyan if configured for alternate traffic color see the 500 series installation manual 14 1 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE TIS INTERFACE This section is written for Garmin GNS 500 Series Main System Software Version 6 01 and later GTX 330 330D Main Software Version 4 01 and later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions NOTE This section is written exclusively for GNS 530 units that are configured with the GTX 330 Mode S Transponder Refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when interfacing with non Garmin products TIS Operation The Traffic Information Service TIS provides a graphi
166. d VOR is also provided for reference Figure 8 19 Nearest FSS Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group FSS Name Bearing To and Distance To Frequency ies VOR Identifier For Duplex Operation GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 10 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES To quickly tune an FSS s frequency from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page 1 Select the Nearest Flight Service Station Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 Figure 8 19 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired FSS 4 Turn the large right knob to scroll down the page Figure 8 20 highlighting the desired frequency COM frequency or VOR frequency for duplex operation Selected Frequency Figure 8 20 Frequency Field Selected 5 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Window 6 Press the COM Flip flop or VLOC Flip flop Key as appropriate to activate the selected frequency figure 8 21 Figure 8 21 Frequency Moved to Active Field Active Frequency Field Selected Frequency 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 11 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 9 NEAREST AIRSPACE PAGE The last pag
167. de is shown above the target next to a symbol If traffic is below own aircraft altitude the relative altitude is shown below the target next to a symbol Altitude trend Figure 14 19 is displayed as an up arrow 500 fpm down arrow 500 fpm or no symbol if less than 500 fpm rate in either direction Figure 14 19 Traffic Symbol Components Relative Altitude Altitude Trend Traffic Type GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 14 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Aural Alerts A TA consists of a displayed traffic symbol solid yellow circle and an aural alert The aural alert announces traffic followed by the intruder aircraft s position altitude relative to own aircraft high low or same altitude and distance from own aircraft e g traffic 12 o clock high 3 miles Self Test The GTS 8XX automatically performs a self test upon power up The self test checks internal parameters and calibrates components of the GTS 8XX The self test can also be initiated by the user during normal operation Check for the following test criteria on the Traffic Page during power up If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft both has a squat switch and is on the ground the Standby Screen is displayed Figure 14 20 If the GTS 8XX passes the power up test and the aircraft both has a squat switch and is air
168. described at the beginning of this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display the CDI Alarms Page Menu Figure 10 45 Figure 10 45 CDI Alarms Page Menu 3 With Restore Defaults highlighted press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 30 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION 11 1 SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION VNAV The GNS 530 s Vertical Navigation Page Figure 11 2 allows you to create a three dimensional profile Figure 11 1 which guides you from your present position and altitude to a final target altitude at a specified location This is helpful when you d like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport or climb to an altitude before reaching a route or direct to waypoint Once the profile is defined message alerts and additional data on the Default NAV and Map Pages keep you informed of your progress NOTE To use the vertical navigation features the ground speed must be greater than 35 knots and direct to navigation or a flight plan must be activated Figure 11 1 VNAV Profile VERTICAL NAVIGATION PROFILE VERTICAL SPEED REQUIRED DISTANCE TO TARGET TIME AND DISTANCE TO PROFILE TARGET ALTITUDE AND POSITION AIRPORT CURRENT ALTITUDE AND POSITION Displaying the Vertical Navigation Page Press the VNAV key Figure 11 2 VNAV Page Cu
169. desired option and press the ENT Key In the flight plan or direct to the departure or arrival airport is replaced with the sequence of waypoints contained within the selected procedure GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 16 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Nearest NRST Pages The NRST Page Group provides detailed information on the nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user created waypoints within 200 nm of the current position In addition pages are also provided to display the five nearest center ARTCC FIR and Flight Service Station FSS points of communication plus alert the pilot to any nearby special use or controlled airspaces There are eight pages available in the NRST group Nearest Airport Page Nearest NDB Page Nearest User Waypoints Page Nearest FSS Page Nearest Intersection Page Nearest VOR Page Nearest ARTCC Page Nearest Airspace Page The communication frequencies and runway information may both be examined directly from the Nearest Airport Page As discussed earlier for the NAV COM Page the pilot may also place any displayed frequency into the standby COM or VLOC field by highlighting the frequency with the cursor and pressing the ENT Key Displaying the NRST pages 1 If necessary press and hold the CLR Key to select the NAV group and display the Default NAV Page 2 Turn the large right knob to se
170. dicated by the TRK label shown on the display This is the only orientation available on this page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 19 Seven display ranges are available allowing for a more complete view of the surrounding area Changing the display range Select the TAWS Page and press up or down on the RNG Key to select the desired range 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50 nm 100 nm Figure 3 36 Display Range Field Figure 3 36 TAWS Display Range Aviation information such as airports VORs and other NAVAIDs can be turned on or off from the TAWS Page Showing or hiding aviation data 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select Show or Hide Aviation Data Figure 3 37 and press the ENT Key Pressing the CLR Key when the TAWS Page is displayed can also be used to toggle aviation information on or off Figure 3 37 TAWS Page Menu Inhibit Mode TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA PDA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Only the FLTA and PDA alert types are disabled in the inhibit mode For more information see the section on TAWS alerts See Section 13 3 for more information on TAWS alerts Inhibiting TAWS 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Figu
171. e 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 1 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 ACCESSORIES AND PACKING LIST Congratulations on choosing the finest most advanced panel mount IFR navigation communication system available The GNS 530 represents Garmin s commitment to provide accurate easy to use avionics Before installing and getting started with the GNS 530 please check to see that the package includes the following items If any parts are missing or damaged please contact a Garmin dealer immediately Standard Package GNS 530 Unit NavData Card Terrain Data Card Installation Rack Connectors GPS Antenna Pilot s Guide Quick Reference Guide 400 500 Series Display Interface Pilot s Guide Addendum Database Subscription Packet Warranty Registration Card GNS 530 Simulator CD ROM The Garmin dealer performs the installation and configuration of the GNS 530 The GNS 530 is secured in the installation rack with the proper wiring connections performed After installation the NavData Card and the Terrain Data Card if applicable are installed into their correct slots on the front of the unit Appendix A A Garmin dealer can answer questions about the installation such as location of antennas or any connections to other equipment in the panel NOTE Help Garmin provide better support by completing on line registration Registration ensures n
172. e Fields Figure 5 20 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 20 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the field to be changed 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired data item Figure 5 21 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 21 Select Field Type Window 5 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor Restoring factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the MENU Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key Activating a flight plan along a specific leg 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint 2 Press the MENU Key and select the Activate Leg option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 22 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 22 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 3 A confirmation window appears With Activate highlighted press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 11 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Selecting an approach for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 Choose the Select Approach option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 23 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 23 Active Flight Plan Page Menu 2 A window app
173. e small right knob to set the density desired i e the transparency see Table 14 7 of the NEXRAD cells The density values are LOW MED HIGH Press the ENT Key to make the selection then press the CLR Key to go back to the Map Page Precipitation Intensity Map Configuration Pattern Color Light Precipitation Low sparse dotted area fill Green Light Precipitation Medium Density dense dotted area fill Green Light Precipitation High Density solid area fill Green Moderate Precipitation Low amp Medium Density dense dotted area fill Yellow Moderate Precipitation High Density solid area fill Yellow Heavy Precipitation Low amp Medium Density dense dotted area fill Red Heavy Precipitation High Density solid area fill Red Table 14 7 NEXRAD Density Patterns NOTE If the pilot changes the NEXRAD Density and or NEXRAD Symbol fields these settings changes also affect the Weather Page For example if the pilot selects Low NEXRAD Density both the Weather Page and the Map Page display the NEXRAD graphics in the Low mode GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 26 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES The pilot may use the NEXRAD Off and NEXRAD On fields in the Page Menu Figure 14 35 to turn off the display of NEXRAD data from the Map Page Figure 14 35 Map Page Options Menu NOTE If the GNS 530 unit
174. e along an extension of the final course segment FAF to MAP until the pilot manually initiates the missed approach procedure as mentioned previously in reference to the SUSP advisory Figure 6 22 Sequence to MAP RW04 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 9 The OBS Key is used to initiate the missed approach as follows refer to Figure 6 22 for the following steps 1 Press the OBS Key The missed approach holding point MAHP in this case SWARM intersection is automatically offered as the destination waypoint NOTE In some cases an additional hold waypoint is added to the missed approach sequence This additional waypoint is used as an aid in establishing the holding pattern especially where the MAP and MAHP are the same waypoint 2 Follow the missed approach procedures as published on the approach plate for proper climb and heading instructions The GNS 530 guides the pilot to the holding pattern along the 053 radial from LYH VOR 3 An alert message in the lower right hand corner of the screen recommends entry procedures for the holding pattern i e HOLD DIRECT HOLD PARALLEL or HOLD TEARDROP see Figure 6 23 When flying the holding pattern a timer appears on the Default NAV Page The timer automatically resets on the outbound side of the hold when the aircraf
175. e in the NRST group the Nearest Airspace Page Figure 8 24 alerts the pilot to as many as nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in the flight path Alerts are provided according to the following conditions If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the alert message Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes appears The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Ahead If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will take the aircraft inside the message Airspace near and ahead appears Figure 8 22 The Nearest Airspace Page shows Within 2nm of airspace Figure 8 22 Airspace Message If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will not take the aircraft inside the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears Figure 8 23 The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Ahead lt 2nm Figure 8 23 Airspace Message If the aircraft has entered an airspace the message Inside Airspace appears The Nearest Airspace Page shows Inside of airspace Note that the airspace alerts are based on three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace Once one of the described condi
176. e is selected the first request is sent after the specified time has elapsed from when the field was set as opposed to immediately sending a request NOTE It is recommended that the pilot turn the Auto Request function on by setting it to 10 min updates This setting provides best performance for the GDL 49 The Manual Send GDL 49 or Update Request GDL 69 field is used to request NEXRAD Data 4 Use the small and large right knobs to select the desired data listed on preceding page and the ENT Key to enter the data into the appropriate fields on the NEXRAD Request Page 5 Select Manual Send or Update Request and press the ENT Key The request has been sent Note that selecting Auto Request and pressing the ENT Key does not send the request until after the auto time period 6 To exit from the NEXRAD Request Page press the small right knob The Data Link Page is displayed Requesting NEXRAD data from the Map Page 1 Select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key The Map Page Options Menu is displayed 3 Select Request NEXRAD Figure 14 32 and press the ENT Key Figure 14 32 Map Page Options Menu 4 Follow the preceding steps 4 6 NOTE The pilot may also use the map panning function to request NEXRAD data at a specific map position After panning and selecting a position on the map the pilot can press the MENU Key and request the NEXRAD da
177. e panning function Map Panning in this section to place the target pointer on a waypoint 2 Press the Direct to Key to display the select Direct to Waypoint Page with the selected waypoint already listed Figure 3 14 Figure 3 14 MAP Waypoint 3 Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection and begin navigating to the waypoint The direct to function can be used anywhere on the map If nothing currently exists at the target pointer location a new waypoint called MAP Figure 3 13 is created at the target pointer location before the direct to is initiated Airspace Information on the Map When a special use or controlled airspace boundary appears on the Map Display the pilot can quickly retrieve information such as floor ceiling limits and controlling agency directly from the map Viewing airspace information for an on screen special use or controlled airspace 1 Use the panning function Map Panning in this section to place the target pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace If the area is congested and it is difficult to select an open area it may be necessary to zoom in or press the CLR Key to make the selection easier Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Select Airspace with Target Pointer 2 Press the ENT Key to display an options menu Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Map Panning Options Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3
178. e that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database Database Versions The version and area of coverage of each terrain obstacle database is shown on the Terrain Database Versions Page located in the AUX Page Group Figures 12 10 and 12 11 also Section 10 3 Databases are checked for integrity at power up If a database is found to be missing and or deficient the TERRAIN system fails the self test and displays the TERRAIN system failure message see Table 12 3 Figure 12 10 Utility Page Figure 12 11 Terrain Database Versions Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 10 SECTION 12 TERRAIN Database Updates Terrain obstacle databases are updated periodically with the latest terrain and obstacle data Visit the Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain obstacle databases compare database cycle numbers to determine if a newer version is available Updated terrain data cards may be obtained by calling Garmin at one of the numbers listed in the front of this document Updating terrain obstacle databases 1 Acquire a new terrain data card from Garmin 2 Turn off the power to the GNS 530 3 Remove the old terrain data card from and insert the new card into the right most slot of the GNS 530 4 Turn on the GNS 530 and verify that the TERRAIN system passes self test Terrain Obstacle Database Areas of Covera
179. e to intercept this final course GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 9 4 SECTION 9 VLOC RECEIVER 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate Figure 9 7 and press the ENT Key Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed Figure 9 7 Highlight Load 7 For VOR and ILS approaches the standby field of the VLOC Window is automatically tuned to the proper frequency To activate the frequency press the VLOC Flip flop Key To display VLOC course information on the external CDI or HSI press the CDI Key and verify that VLOC is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen directly above the CLR Key 8 For precision approaches and some non precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receivers and external CDI or HSI for primary navigation To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key CDI Key The GNS 530 s CDI Key is used to couple the GPS or VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI When the external CDI or HSI is being driven by the GPS receiver GPS appears at the bottom left corner of t
180. e used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the nearby VOR The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the VLOC window and activated using the VLOC Flip flop Key Figure 8 13 Nearest VOR Page Bearing To and Distance To Scroll Bar Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group VOR Frequency VOR Identifier and Symbol GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 7 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Quickly tuning a VOR s frequency from the nearest VOR Page 1 Select the nearest VOR Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the frequency associated with the desired VOR Figure 8 14 Figure 8 14 Frequency Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the VLOC Window 5 Press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Viewing additional information for a nearby VOR 1 Select the Nearest VOR Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired VOR Figure 8 15 4 Press the ENT Key to display the VOR Pa
181. ears listing the available approaches Figure 5 24 for the destination airport Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired approach and press the ENT Key Figure 5 24 Approach Window 3 A second window appears listing available transitions Figure 5 25 for the approach Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press the ENT Key The Vectors option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance to intercept this final course Figure 5 25 Transitions Window 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate and press the ENT Key Load adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original flight plan until cleared for the approach but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed 5 For precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 12 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Selecting an arrival for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 Select the Select Arrival option from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Figure 5 26 and press the E
182. ect that waypoint on the User Waypoint Page and enter the new position information directly over the old information Modifying a user waypoint by changing its latitude longitude position 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the position field at the bottom of the page 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the new position coordinates Figure 7 42 and press the ENT Key to accept the selected position Figure 7 42 Position Field Selected 5 The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press the ENT Key to modify the waypoint 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Modifying a user waypoint by changing reference waypoint information 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field to change the reference waypoint Otherwise continue turning the large right knob to highlight the radial RAD or distance DIS field as desired 4 Use the small and large right knobs to change the identifier if desired of the reference waypoint Fig
183. ection GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 23 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Changing the ILS CDI scale 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the ILS CDI Capture field 3 Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual as desired Figure 10 34 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection Figure 10 34 ILS CDI Window Setting the arrival alarm and alarm distance 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the On Off field directly below Arrival Alarm 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off as desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selection 4 The flashing cursor moves to the alarm distance field to the immediate right of On or Off To enter an arrival alarm distance use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired alarm distance Press the ENT Key when finished NOTE The CDI scale is always measured in nautical miles regardless of the current distance units of measure selected on the Units Position Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 24 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup Page Units Position Setting the magnetic variation 1 Select Unit
184. ed or pressed state Try pressing the OBS Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Poor GPS coverage The GPS receiver cannot acquire a sufficient number of satellites to compute a position and provide navigation Power down and re initialize The GNS 530 cannot calculate a position due to abnormal satellite conditions The unit is unusable until power has been cycled off and back on Abnormal satellite conditions may exist and the pilot may need to use an alternate means of navigation RAIM is not available Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage does not exist for the current phase of flight The CDI HSI NAV flag also appears Select an alternate source for navigation guidance such as the GNS 530 s VLOC receiver RAIM not available from FAF to MAP waypoints When performing an instrument approach Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage does not exist to meet the required protection limits Select an alternate source for navigation guidance such as the GNS 530 s VLOC receiver for a VOR or localizer based approach RAIM position warning Although sufficient GPS satellite coverage may exist Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined the information from one or more GPS satellites may be in error The resulting GPS p
185. efault NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page which are available as part of the NAV Page Group These pages are used for most of the in flight navigation The takeoff tour assumes that the unit and antennas have been properly installed and that the GNS 530 s default settings have not been changed If any of the factory default settings position format units of measure selectable fields etc have been changed the pictures shown here may not exactly match what is shown on the GNS 530 Prior to using the GNS 530 for the first time Garmin recommends that the aircraft be moved to a location that is well away from buildings and other aircraft so the unit can collect satellite data without interruption This takeoff tour is intended to provide a brief introduction of the GNS 530 s major features Sections 2 through 14 of this manual describe these features and others in additional detail Refer to these sections as needed to learn or review the details regarding a particular feature After becoming familiar with the basics some suggested reading within this Pilot s Guide includes Flight plan features Section 5 IFR procedures Section 6 Waypoint information pages database information Section 7 Unit settings configuring the unit to the pilot s preferences Section 10 If more information is needed Garmin s Customer Service staff is available during normal business hours U
186. emains current Updates are released every 28 days A database information packet is included in the GNS 530 package Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk WARNING The basemap land and water data must not be used for navigation but rather only for non navigational situational awareness Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation sources WARNING For safety reasons GNS 530 operational procedures must be learned on the ground WARNING The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Portions of the Garmin GNS 530 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID NAVAID Therefore as with all NAVAIDs information presented by the GNS 530 can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H vi WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES WARNING Use the GNS 530 Weather Data Link Interface TIS and TAWS at your own risk To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and understand all aspects of the GNS 530 Pilot s Guide documentation and the GNS 530 Flight Manual Supplement Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use During flight operations carefully compare indications from the GNS 530 to all available navigatio
187. en made to delete the active to or from waypoint The GNS 530 will not allow the deletion of user waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance CDI key stuck The CDI Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the CDI Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Check unit cooling The GNS 530 has detected excessive display backlighting temperature The backlighting has been automatically dimmed to reduce the temperature Check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow Contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM has failed The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its communications transceiver The COM transceiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service COM is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the COM transceiver has failed Operational status of the COM transceiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service COM needs service The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its communications transceiver The COM transceiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service COM push to talk key stuck The external push to talk PTT switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the PTT switch again to cycle its operation If t
188. ents is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service Timer has expired The count down timer has reached zero Traffic device needs service Either the TCAD battery or the TCAD interrogation device has failed If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Unit configuration has changed The GNS 530 has detected a failure during initial power up in its system configuration Some system components may be unusable Try cycling power off and back on If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance User card format unknown A data card has been inserted but the format of the card is not recognized VLOC has failed The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service VLOC is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the VLOC receiver has failed Operational status of the VLOC receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service VLOC needs service The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 8 VLOC remote transfe
189. enu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing access to the various unit settings Figure 10 28 Setup Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 19 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Selecting a menu option from the Setup Page 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option and press the ENT Key Figure 10 29 Figure 10 29 Units Position Page The following menu options are available CDI Alarms Allows the pilot to define the scale for the GNS 530 s on screen course deviation indicator The scale values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side Figure 10 30 The default setting is Auto At this setting the CDI scale is set to 5 nm during the enroute oceanic phase of flight Within 30 nm of the destination airport the CDI scale gradually ramps down to 1 0 nm terminal area Likewise when leaving the departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1 0 nm and gradually ramps UP to 5 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport During approach operations the CDI scale gradually ramps down even further to 0 3 nm This transition normally occurs within 2 0 nm of the final appr
190. er frequency ies is also listed on the Airport Frequency Page Figure 7 13 The Airport Frequency Page may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or VLOC frequency To view frequency information for a particular airport on the Airport Frequency Page enter the Airport s Identifier per Section 7 1 Figure 7 13 Airport Frequency Page Scroll Bar Usage Restrictions Information Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Frequency Frequency Type Scrolling through the frequency list and tuning to a desired frequency on the list 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list placing the cursor on the desired frequency Figure 7 14 If there are more frequencies in the list than can be displayed on the screen a scroll bar Figure 7 13 along the right hand side of the screen indicates the cursor s position within the list Figure 7 14 111 55 Highlighted 3 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC Window Figure 7 15 Figure 7 15 111 55 Moved to Standby Field VLOC Standby Field 4 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Some listed frequencies may include designations for limited usage as follows TX Transmit only RX Rece
191. er per Section 7 1 Figure 7 9 Airport Runway Page Map Image Airport Identifier Symbol and Type Runway Designations Runway Length and Width Runway Surface Runway Lighting Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Displaying information for each additional runway 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the runway designation field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window listing all runways for the selected airport Figure 7 10 Figure 7 10 Runway Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway 5 Press the ENT Key to display information for the selected runway on the Airport Runway Page Figure 7 11 Figure 7 11 Airport Runway Page 6 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 7 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Adjusting the range of the map image 1 Press the down arrow of the RNG Key to display a smaller map area 2 Press the up arrow of the RNG Key to display a larger map area The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Runway Page Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Surface Runway surface types include Hard Turf Sealed Gravel Dirt Soft Unknown or W
192. er the old name Press the ENT Key to accept the new name Figure 7 47 User Waypoint Name Selected 4 A rename waypoint confirmation window is displayed Figure 7 48 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to rename the selected user waypoint Figure 7 48 Rename Waypoint Window Deleting a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Press the CLR Key to display a delete waypoint confirmation window Figure 7 49 Figure 7 49 Delete Waypoint Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete the selected user waypoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 25 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Deleting all user waypoints from memory 1 Select the User Waypoint List as described in this section 2 Press the MENU Key to display a menu for the User Waypoint List Figure 7 50 Figure 7 50 User Waypoint List Page Menu 3 With Delete All User Waypoints highlighted press the ENT Key 4 A delete all waypoints confirmation window is displayed Figure 7 51 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to delete all user waypoints from memory Figure 7 51 Delete All Waypoints Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 26 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilo
193. erence 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS B 1 APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS PHYSICAL Unit Size 6 25 W x 11 00 D x 4 60 H 159 mm x 279 mm x 117 mm Unit Weight 8 5 pounds installed 3 9 kg POWER Input 28 Vdc early GNS 530 all GNS 530A units 14 28 Vdc later 530 units ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature 20 C to 55 C operating range 4 F to 131 F Humidity 95 non condensing Altitude 1 500 ft to 50 000 ft 457 m to 15 240 m GPS PERFORMANCE Receiver 12 parallel channel PhaseTrac12 Acquisition Time 12 seconds warm 45 seconds cold Update Rate Once per second continuous Accuracy Position 15 meters 49 ft RMS Velocity 0 1 knot RMS steady state Dynamics 999 kts maximum velocity 6g maximum acceleration VHF COM PERFORMANCE Channels 760 25 kHz spacing or 2280 8 33 kHz spacing Frequency Range 118 000 MHz to 136 975 MHz Transmit Power 10 watts minimum GNS 530 16 watts minimum GNS 530A VOR PERFORMANCE Frequency Range 108 00 MHz to 117 95 MHz LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE Frequency Range 108 10 MHz to 111 95 MHz GLIDESLOPE PERFORMANCE Frequency Range 329 15 MHz to 335 00 MHz INTERFACES ARINC 429 Aviation RS 232 CDI HSI RMI digital clock data Superflag Out Altitude serial Icarus Shadin Rosetta or encoded Gillham Greycode Fuel Sensor Fuel Air Data Earlier versions of the 530 were designed
194. errain TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 2 SECTION 12 TERRAIN TERRAIN Alerting TERRAIN uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine TERRAIN alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts TERRAIN utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level MSL Using the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude TERRAIN displays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft s flight path in relation
195. ersions Provides software version information for the operating software within the GPS receiver COM transceiver and main processor board Database Versions Displays the current Jeppesen database type and expiration date along with the version and type of built in land database Terrain Database Versions Displays the current version and area of coverage of each terrain and obstacle database If a database is found to be missing and or deficient the TAWS system fails the self test and issues a failure message Utility Page Checklists Creating a checklist 1 Select Checklist from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 Press the ENT Key to display a list of checklists 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Checklist Page Menu Figure 10 18 Turn the large right knob to select Create New Checklist and press the ENT Key Figure 10 18 Checklist Page Menu 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of a checklist Press the ENT Key when finished Up to nine different checklists can be created and stored in the GNS 530 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter each checklist item followed each time by the ENT Key Each checklist may contain up to 30 line items of as much as 16 characters long GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 13 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Executing a checklist 1 With t
196. ess and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page Figure 10 2 If any of the main pages are already displayed this step may be skipped Figure 10 2 Default NAV Page 2 Turn the large right knob to select the AUX Page Group Figure 10 3 AUX appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 10 3 Flight Planning Page 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired AUX page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 2 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 2 FLIGHT PLANNING PAGE The Flight Planning Page Figure 10 4 provides access via menu options to E6B functions for fuel planning trip planning density altitude true airspeed winds aloft calculations and a Crossfill function to transfer flight plans user waypoints to a second 400 500 series Garmin unit When a menu option is selected the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features Figure 10 4 Flight Planning Page Current Page Group Menu Options to Select Highlight with Cursor and Press the ENT Key Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Selecting a menu option from the Flight Planning Page 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor Figure 10 4 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired menu option 3 Press the ENT Key Figure 10 5 to display the desired page Figure 10 5 Dens
197. ey 7 To return to the Nearest Airspace Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 14 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES The Airspace Page Figure 8 28 displays and airspace alert messages are provided for the following airspace types Alert Caution Class B Class C Class D CTA Danger MOA Prohibited Restricted TMA Training TRSA Unspecified Warning The bottom right hand corner of the Airspace Page displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace The following are examples of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace 5000 ft msl 5000 feet mean sea level 5000 ft agl 5000 feet above ground level MSL at mean sea level Notam Notice to Airmen Unknown Unlimited See Chart Surface All airspace alert messages except for prohibited areas may be turned on or off from the Airspace Alarms Page An altitude buffer is also provided on the Airspace Alarms Page to provide an extra margin of safety above below the published limits Section 10 4 Setup Page Airspace Alarms for additional details Figure 8 28 Airspace Page for MOA GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 9 1 SECTION 9
198. face refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when interfacing with non Garmin products WARNING The GTS 8XX interface is intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS or TCAS I traffic information It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and manuever to avoid traffic NOTE This section assumes the user has experience operating the GNS 530 and the GTS 8XX NOTE References to the GTS 8XX throughout this document refer equally to the GTS 800 GTS 820 and GTS 850 unless otherwise noted NOTE TIS is disabled when a GTS 8XX unit is installed Symbol Traffic Type Description Traffic Advisory TA A TA Traffic Advisory is generated when the GTS 8XX predicts that an intruder aircraft may pose a collision threat A solid yellow circle represents an intruder aircraft that meets the TA criteria as described in the TA Alerting Conditions section A TA consists of the traffic symbol and an aural alert e g traffic 12 o clock high 3 miles Out of Range Traffic Advisory This solid yellow half circle appears on the outer range ring under the same conditions and has the same urgency as a TA Its appearance differs from the TA only to signify that the intruder is outside of the current range of the Traffic Page Proximity Advisory PA Proximity Advisories PA are di
199. feet below the aircraft altitude Black Symbol Terrain Obstacle is more than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude NOTE Obstacle symbols are shown on display zoom ranges up to 10 nm Unlighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles lt 1000 feet AGL Unlighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Lighted Obstacles gt 1000 feet AGL Potential Impact Points Figure 3 33 TERRAIN Symbols NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 18 3 6 TAWS PAGE NOTE GNS 530 units may display either a TERRAIN Page or a TAWS Page but not both depending upon the installed hardware and configuration Some earlier units are not equipped to support the TERRAIN and or TAWS functionality so therefore will not have a TERRAIN or TAWS page available TAWS Page To display the TAWS Page select the NAV Page Group and turn the small right knob until the TAWS Page is displayed Figure 3 34 The TAWS Page displays GPS derived MSL altitude in increments of 20 feet or 10 meters depending on unit configura tion The G to right of the MSL altitude display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS derived Aircraft ground track Terrain Range Indicates the terrain elevation in co
200. field displays a radial from the nearest VOR However the pilot can select any waypoint by identifier to use as a reference in this field The GNS 530 can store user defined waypoints which are generated from other equipment in the panel For example an EFIS equipped with joystick inputs can be used to create user waypoints which if the installation supports this automatically transfer to the GNS 530 Creating User Waypoints from the Map Page The Map Page and panning target pointer Section 3 4 Map Panning provide a quick means of saving the present position as a user defined waypoint Capturing and saving the present position as a user waypoint 1 With the Map Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the panning function The target pointer appears at the present position Figure 7 41 Figure 7 41 Activate Panning Function 2 Press the ENT Key to capture the position and display the User Waypoint Page 3 A four digit name is automatically assigned to the waypoint To change this name turn the large right knob to highlight the name field then use the small and large right knobs to select a new name Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name 4 The cursor moves to the Create action field Press the ENT Key to save the new waypoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 21 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Modifying User Waypoints To modify an existing waypoint sel
201. ge Table 12 5 lists the area of coverage available in each database Regional definitions may change without notice Database Coverage Area Worldwide WW Latitudes N75 to S60 Longitudes W180 to E180 United States US Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada Mexico Caribbean and the Pacific US Europe Alaska Austria Belgium Canada Caribbean Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hawaii Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Indicates partial coverage Table 12 5 Database Coverage Areas GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 1 SECTION 13 TAWS SECTION 13 TAWS NOTE GNS 530 units may display either a TERRAIN Page or a TAWS Page but not both depending upon the installed hardware and configuration Some earlier units are not equipped to support the TERRAIN and or TAWS functionality so therefore will not have a TERRAIN or TAWS page available 13 1 INTRODUCTION TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System is a feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain CFIT TAWS satisfies TSO C151b Class B requirements for certification Class B TAWS is required for all Part 91 aircraft operations with six or more passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine ai
202. ge Figure 8 11 displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest intersections within 200 nm of the present position To view additional information for a nearby intersection start from the Nearest Intersection Page and follow the preceding steps 2 through 4 Figure 8 11 Nearest Intersection Page Bearing To and Distance To Intersection Identifier and Symbol Scroll Bar Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 6 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 4 NEAREST NDB PAGE The Nearest NDB Page Figure 8 12 displays the identifier symbol bearing distance and frequency to the nine nearest NDBs within 200 nm of the present position To view additional information for a nearby NDB start from the nearest NDB Page and follow the preceding steps 2 through 4 Figure 8 12 Nearest NDB Page Scroll Bar Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Bearing To and Distance To Intersection Identifier and Symbol NDB Frequency 8 5 NEAREST VOR PAGE The Nearest VOR Page Figure 8 13 displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the nine nearest VORs within 200 nm of the present position For each VOR listed the nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may b
203. ge has resulted in a horizontal DOP greater than 4 0 Additional cross checking using another navigation source is required to verify the integrity of the GPS position Display backlight failure The GNS 530 has detected a failure in the display backlighting The unit should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service Do not use for navigation The GNS 530 is in Demo Mode and must not be used for actual navigation FPL has been truncated The flight plan FPL was truncated because not enough room existed to insert an approach departure or arrival This message also appears when an approach has been deleted from a stored flight plan because an approach could not be found These conditions may occur upon power up when a database change increases the number of waypoints in or removes an approach from an instrument procedure FPL is full remove unnecessary waypoints An attempt has been made to add more than 31 waypoints to a flight plan FPL The GNS 530 does not allow more than 31 waypoints per flight plan FPL leg will not be smoothed The upcoming flight plan FPL leg is too short for smooth waypoint transitions Expect a rapid change in the CDI GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 4 FPL waypoint is locked At least one flight plan FPL waypoint is locked because the waypoint has been removed from the current NavData ca
204. ge for the selected VOR Figure 8 15 Nearest VOR Page 5 To return to the Nearest VOR Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 8 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 6 NEAREST USER WAyPOINT PAGE The Nearest User Waypoint Page Figure 8 16 displays the name bearing and distance to the nine nearest user waypoints within 200 nm of the present position Figure 8 16 Nearest User Waypoint Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Bearing To and Distance To Waypoint Identifier and Symbol 8 7 NEAREST CENTER ARTCC PAGE The Nearest Center Page Figure 8 17 displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC points of communication within 200 nm of the present position For each ARTCC listed the Nearest Center Page also indicates one or more frequencies and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the center s frequency The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM Window and activated using the COM Flip flop Key Figure 8 17 Nearest ARTCC Page ARTCC Name Frequency ies Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page
205. ght knob to select Self Test 4 Press the ENT Key TEST is displayed Figure 14 21 Self Test Mode Test Mode Indication GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 15 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Switching Between Standby and Operating Modes The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed The ability to switch out of standby into operating mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff Operating Mode is confirmed by the display of OPER in the upper right hand corner of the Traffic Page Figure 14 22 Switching to Operating Mode from Standby Mode 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight STBY 2 Turn the small right knob to select OPER 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm and place the GTS 8XX in operating mode the GTS 8XX switches out of standby into the 6 nm display range NOTE The GTS 8XX will automatically switch out of standby 8 to 10 seconds after takeoff which is determined by ground speed or by a transition of the aircraft squat switch if connected Switching to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight OPER 2 Turn the small right knob to select STBY 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm and place the GTS 8XX in standby mode NOTE The GTS 8XX goes into standby mode 24
206. ghts the waypoint field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the waypoint at which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Key when finished To determine RAIM availability for the present position press the CLR Key followed by the ENT Key 3 The flashing cursor moves to the arrival date field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the date for which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Key when finished 4 The flashing cursor moves to the arrival time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the time for which the pilot wants to determine RAIM availability Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 17 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 The flashing cursor moves to Compute RAIM Figure 10 24 Press the ENT Key to begin RAIM prediction Once calculations are complete the GNS 530 displays one of the following in the RAIM status field Figure 10 24 Compute RAIM Highlighted RAIM Not Available Satellite coverage is predicted to NOT be sufficient for reliable operation during non precision approaches RAIM Available Satellite coverage is predicted to be sufficient for reliable operation during all flight phases including non precision approaches NOTE RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within 15 minutes of the specified arrival date and time
207. h examples are intended for instructional use only and are not to be used for navigation GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 4 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 7 Sample Approach Select Destination Select and Load the approach Activate the approach Approach operations on the GNS 530 typically begin with the same basic steps refer to Figure 6 7 for the following steps 1 Select the destination airport using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in the active flight plan 2 Choose the Select Approach option from the Procedures Page Section 6 1 or from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu Section 5 2 Active Flight Plan Options 3 Load the approach often while enroute in anticipation of its future use This places the approach in the active flight plan but retains course guidance in the enroute section until the approach is activated 4 Activate the full approach or vectors to final as appropriate In some scenarios it may be more convenient to immediately activate the approach and skip the Load process outlined in the preceding step 3 The GNS 530 provides both options Approaches with Procedure Turns The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of the approach For this reason the GNS 530 requires no special operations from the pilot other than flying the
208. he page directly above the CDI Key When the external CDI or HSI if being driven by the VLOC receiver VLOC appears instead To couple the external CDI or HSI to the GPS receiver or VLOC receiver press the CDI Key to display GPS or VLOC as desired Figure 9 8 Figure 9 8 GPS and VLOC Annunciators GPS Annunciator VLOC Annunciator NOTE The external CDI or HSI must be coupled to the VLOC receiver for approaches which are not approved for GPS See ILS example in Section 6 3 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 1 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 10 1 AUX PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 530 s main page groups Table 10 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group The third page group AUX allows the pilot to change unit settings The AUX pages Figure 10 1 also provide trip planning fuel planning density altitude true airspeed and winds aloft calculations Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 3 AUX pages see Section 8 Table 10 1 Page Groups Figure 10 1 AUX Pages Flight Planning Utility Setup NOTE The AUX Page Group may have four AUX pages available when the GNS 530 installation includes connection to a weather information source See Section 14 of this manual for more information Quickly selecting an AUX page 1 From any page pr
209. he Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key 2 As each checklist item is completed press the ENT Key to move to the next item on the list Editing a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key 2 Press the MENU Key to display an options menu Select Edit Item and press the ENT Key then use the small and large right knobs to edit each checklist item Press the ENT Key when finished Inserting a checklist step into an existing checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the existing checklist entry which immediately follows the new checklist step 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to enter the new checklist step Press the ENT Key when finished Deleting a checklist or all checklists 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press the MENU Key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select delete checklist or delete all checklists and press the ENT Key 3 With Yes highlighted on the confirmation window figure 10 19 press the ENT Key to remove the checklist or all checklists from memory Figure 10 19 Delete Checklist Confirmation Window GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Referen
210. he active frequency field by pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key If this is not done a Select appropriate frequency for approach message appears within 3 0 nm of the FAF When flying a localizer based approach other than backcourse with automatic CDI switching enabled GPS guidance is used while flying 1 outbound and on the initial portion of the procedure turn VLOC guidance is used on the remainder 2 of the approach from the time the pilot turns inbound on the procedure turn The localizer 3 frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance When flying a localizer based approach with automatic CDI switching disabled The pilot may select VLOC guidance 1 at any point on the approach prior to reaching the FAF The localizer 2 frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 34 Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 1 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 1 WPT PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 530 s main page groups Table 7 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group This second page group WPT provides information for the thousands of airports VORs NDBs intersections runways frequencies and procedures stored on the Jeppesen NavData card A WPT page is also provided to display information for up to 1
211. he desired airport 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected airport and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function Shortcuts Shortcuts are available when using the Direct to Key allowing the pilot to bypass the use of the small and large right knobs to enter the destination waypoint s identifier A direct to can be performed from any page displaying a single waypoint identifier such as the WPT pages for airports and NAVAIDs For pages that display a list of waypoints e g the Nearest Airport Page the desired waypoint must be highlighted with the cursor before pressing the Direct to Key Selecting an on screen waypoint as a direct to destination 1 If a single airport NAVAID or user waypoint is displayed on screen Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 Single Waypoint Displayed a Press the Direct to Key b Press the ENT Key twice GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 5 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION 2 If a list of waypoints is displayed on screen a Press the small right knob to activate the cursor b Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired waypoint Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 Nearest List c Press the Direct to Key followed by the ENT Key twice Selecting a Direct to destination from the Map Page Direct to destinations may also be selected from the Map Page If no airport NAVAID or user waypoint exists at the desired location a wa
212. he longest runway Figure 8 6 Figure 8 6 Nearest Airport Page Airport Identifier Symbol Bearing To and Distance To Tower or CTAF Frequency and Longest Runway Best Available Approach Scroll Bar Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The Nearest Airport Page can be configured to exclude shorter runways or undesirable runway surface types so that the corresponding airports do not appear on the list The pilot may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases or runway lengths which would be difficult or impossible to land upon See Section 10 5 Setup Page Nearest Airport Criteria for additional details GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 4 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Quickly tuning the common traffic advisory frequency CTAF from the Nearest Airport Page 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the COM frequency associated with the desired airport 4 Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Figure 8 7 Figure 8 7 Frequency Moved to Standby Field Standby Frequency Field Selected Frequency 5 Press the COM Flip flop Key to activate the selected frequency Figure 8 8 Act
213. he message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM remote transfer key is stuck The remote COM transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM transfer key stuck The COM Flip flop Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the COM Flip flop Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance COM transmitter power has been reduced The GNS 530 has detected excessive unit temperature and or an insufficient voltage level The COM transceiver transmit power has been automatically reduced to compensate for the condition For excessive temperatures check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Data card failure The GNS 530 has detected a problem with the NavData card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to Jeppesen or a Garmin dealer GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 3 Data transfer cancelled crossfill is busy An attempt to transfer flight plan data during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled The host unit is busy or unable to communicate Wait until any previous crossfill operation is complete before attempting the transfer
214. he preceding page options to remove approaches departures and arrivals were introduced This process may also be completed using the CLR Key described as follows Removing an approach departure or arrival using the CLR Key 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the title for the approach Figure 5 32 departure or arrival to be deleted Titles appear in light blue directly above the procedure s waypoints Figure 5 32 Highlight Item To Be Deleted 3 Press the CLR Key to display a confirmation window Figure 5 33 Figure 5 33 Remove Approach Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the selected procedure This same process may also be used to remove individual waypoints from the active flight plan Removing a waypoint using the CLR Key 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the identifier for the waypoint to be deleted Identifiers appear in green text 3 Press the CLR Key to display a confirmation window Figure 5 34 Figure 5 34 Remove Waypoint Window 4 With Yes highlighted press the ENT Key to remove the selected procedure GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 15 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS The Activate Leg option is
215. he small right knob to select On or Off 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option Displaying airports NAVAIDs active flight plan waypoints user created waypoints state provincial boundaries rivers lakes and cities 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the appropriate Group name per the table on the preceding page and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the zoom field for the desired feature 4 Turn the small right knob to select the maximum range at which the feature should appear on screen or select Off to never display the selected feature 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option 6 Turn the large right knob to highlight the text field for the desired feature 7 Turn the small right knob to select the desired text size or select None to disable text descriptions 8 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option For airspace boundaries highways roads railroad lines track log data active flight plan course lines and lat long grid lines 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select the appropriate Group name per the table on the preceding page and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob
216. hing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the ground speed Press the ENT Key when finished 8 With all variables entered the following information is provided DTK Desired track or desired course DIS Distance ETE Estimated time enroute ESA Enroute safe altitude ETA Estimated time of arrival Flight Planning Page Density Alt TAS Winds Calculating density altitude true airspeed and winds aloft 1 Select Density Alt TAS Winds from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the indicated altitude IND ALT field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the altitude indicated on the altimeter Figure 10 9 Press the ENT Key when finished Figure 10 9 Indicated Altitude Selected 3 The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated airspeed CAS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the airspeed from the airspeed indicator Press the ENT Key when finished 4 The flashing cursor moves to the barometric pressure BARO field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the barometric pressure altimeter setting Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 7 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 The flashing cursor moves to the total air temperature TAT field Use the small and
217. hows the symbols used on the Default NAV Page directly above the CDI to depict the active leg of a flight plan or direct to Symbol Description Direct to a Waypoint Course to a Waypoint or Desired Course between Two Waypoints Procedure Turn Procedure Turn Vectors to Final DME Arc to the Left DME Arc to the Right Left hand Holding Pattern Right hand Holding Pattern Table 3 2 NAV Page Symbols GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 4 Selecting Desired On Screen Data At the bottom of the Default NAV Page there are six user definable fields which display the data needed as the flight progresses Figure 3 3 By default these fields display distance to destination DIS desired track DTK bearing to destination BRG ground speed GS ground track TRK and estimated time enroute ETE However each of these fields can be customized to display a different data item Available data items include Bearing to destination BRG Course to steer CTS Cross track error XTK Desired track DTK Distance to destination DIS Enroute safe altitude ESA Estimated time of arrival ETA Estimate time enroute ETE Fuel flow FLOW when configured Ground speed GS Ground track TRK Minimum safe altitude MSA Track angle error TKE Vertical speed required VSR If
218. hted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan FPL field Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 Highlighted Flight Plan Field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 FPL Flight Plan Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 4 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct to Destination The Select Direct to Waypoint Page always displays the nearest airports from the present position in the NRST field Navigating directly to a nearby airport is always just a few simple steps away Nearby airports may also be selected as direct to destinations using the steps described in Section 8 1 Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the nearest airport NRST field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window showing up to nine nearby airports Figure 4 9 Figure 4 9 Nearest Window 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through the list and highlight t
219. hts the GROUP field 5 Turn the small right knob to select Traffic 6 Press the ENT Key Figure 14 27 Figure 14 27 Traffic Setup Menu 7 Turn the large right knob to select the desired Traffic Mode option 8 Turn the small right knob to select the desired option 9 Press the ENT Key Repeat steps 7 9 for Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 18 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 10 Return to the Map Page by pressing the CLR Key Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page Traffic in a thumbnail format can be displayed in any of the three data fields on the right side of the Map Page Figure 14 28 Displaying Thumbnail Traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Change Fields 4 Press the ENT Key 5 Turn the large right knob to select one of the three fields 6 Turn the small right knob to select TRFC from the Select Field Type List 7 Press the ENT Key Figure 14 28 Figure 14 28 Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page NOTE The thumbnail range defaults to 6 nm and cannot be changed Highlighting Traffic Data Using Map Panning Another map page function is panning which allows changing the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale Select the panning function by pressing
220. ice GPS needs service The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its GPS receiver The GPS receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service GPS stored data was lost Satellite almanac ephemeris and time data have been lost due to a memory battery failure system reset or data expiration data over six months old Heading input failure The heading selection on the external HSI s or CDI s OBS course selector cannot be read properly A Garmin dealer may need to check the installation Inside airspace A GPS calculated position lies within the boundaries of a special use airspace This message is automatically disabled within 30 nm of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Invalid closest pt of FPL A closest point cannot be created from the waypoint entered on the Closest point of flight plan window This occurs when the selected waypoint is beyond the limits of all legs in the flight plan too far away or when a unique waypoint name for the closest point cannot be created Invalid FPL modification An attempt was made to modify the final course segment FAF to MAP of an instrument approach The GNS 530 does not allow the modifications GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 5 Invalid waypoint ident An attempt was made to create a user w
221. ice Page Figure 2 7 Figure 2 7 Nearest ARTCC Page 3 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the page 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight the FSS ARTCC frequency 5 Press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Selecting a COM frequency for any airport in the flight plan 1 Select the NAV COM Page from the NAV Page Group Section 3 1 or press and hold the CLR Key then turn the small right knob until the NAV COM Page appears 2 Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field To the left of this field appears Departure Enroute or Arrival depending on the placement of the displayed airport within the flight plan 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window Figure 2 8 listing the airports in the flight plan Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired airport Figure 2 8 NAV COM Page Airport Window 4 Press the ENT Key to return to the NAV COM Page with the frequencies for the selected airport 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 6 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM Window field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 5 SECTION 2 COM Selecting a COM frequency for any airport in the database 1 Turn the large right knob to select the WPT Page Group 2 Turn the small r
222. ich include a Shadin fuel computer In these installations use the Change Fields option to review separate fuel information for left and right engines 3 For point to point fuel planning Figure 10 6 turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the from waypoint Once the waypoint s identifier is entered press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint OR Figure 10 6 Fuel Planning Page Point to Point 4 For flight plan fuel planning Figure 10 7 turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan by number already stored in memory 00 is the active flight plan Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply fuel planning calculations to the entire flight plan Figure 10 7 Fuel Planning Page Flight Plan 5 If the fuel management system does not enter the data automatically turn the large right knob to highlight the fuel on board FOB field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 5 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 6 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the amount of fuel on board Press the ENT Key when finished 7 The flashing cursor moves to the
223. ics METAR Winds and Temperature Dewpoints Age Graphics 0 10 minutes Green 11 20 minutes Green 21 30 minutes Green 31 60 minutes Green 61 minutes Yellow Unknown Yellow Table 14 13 Weather Age Graphics METARs Precipitation Graphics Light Green Moderate Green Heavy Yellow No Precipitation Rain Snow Unknown Table 14 14 Precipitation Graphics Ceiling and Visibility Flight Rules VFR Marginal VFR IFR Low IFR Table 14 15 Ceiling and Visibility Graphics The symbol in Figure 14 47 indicates the ceiling at KMWM is marginal VFR with heavy snow and low IFR visibility The data age is 31 60 minutes old Ceiling Precipitation Visibility Station Identifier Data Age Figure 14 47 METAR Symbol GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 37 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Winds Wind Vector The wind vector indicates the direction of the surface wind to the nearest 30 increment e g 30 60 90 120 etc Wind Speed In general the sum of the wind barbs see Table 14 16 is the sustained surface wind speed Wind Speed Blank Unknown Short Barb 5 kts Long Barb 10 kts 37 kts Table 14 16 Wind Speed Graphics Gust Offset Blank Gusts are unknown or lt 5 kts above sustained wind speed G10 Green Wind is gusting 5 10 kts more than sustained speed G11 Yellow
224. ight knob to select the Airport Frequencies Page Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Airport Frequencies Page 3 Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired airport Press the ENT Key when finished 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 6 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM Window field Emergency Channel The GNS 530 s emergency channel select provides a quick method of selecting 121 500 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in flight emergency Emergency channel select is available anytime the unit is on regardless of GPS or cursor status or loss of the display Quickly tuning and activating 121 500 Press and hold the COM Flip flop Key or COM Remote Transfer Switch for approximately two seconds Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Emergency Channel Active If the COM Remote Transfer switch is used to select the emergency channel further changes in COM frequency will not be possible without momentarily pressing the COM Remote Tranfer Switch again or by cycling unit power NOTE Under some circumstances if the COM system loses communication with the main system the radio will automatically tune to 121 500 MHz for transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 6
225. ilable when the GNS 530 installation includes connection to traffic and or weather information sources See Section 14 of this manual for more information 3 3 DEFAULT NAV PAGE The first NAV page is the Default NAV Page Figure 3 4 The Default NAV Page displays a look ahead map display with your present position at the bottom center of the page The top of the page displays desired track DTK ground track TRK and distance to destination waypoint DIS The bottom of the page indicates ground speed GS active to from waypoints only active to for a direct to destination and estimated time enroute ETE A graphic course deviation indicator CDI also appears at the bottom of the page Unlike the angular limits used on a mechanical CDI coupled to a VOR or ILS receiver full scale limits for this CDI are defined by a GPS derived distance 0 3 1 0 or 5 0 nm as indicated at both ends of the CDI By default the CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of flight oceanic enroute terminal area or approach The pilot may also manually select the desired scale setting as outlined in Section 10 4 Course Deviation Indicator CDI User Selectable Data Fields all four corners Active Leg of Flight Plan or Direct to Destination Figure 3 4 Default NAV Page Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group
226. ilable or has expired if the unit hasn t been used for six months or more This means the unit is acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information which can take five to ten minutes The data is recollected from the first available satellite The Satellite Status Page displays a Search Sky status and the message annunciator MSG above the MSG Key also flashes to alert the pilot of system message Searching the Sky Viewing a system message Press the MSG Key Figure 1 11 The Message Page appears and displays the status or warning information applicable to the receiver s current operating condition Figure 1 11 Message Page Returning to the previous page after viewing a message Press the MSG Key again NOTE The GNS 530 utilizes certain software algorithms to ensure reliable GPS receiver operation Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM and Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE are two examples These features allow navigation during Oceanic Remote legs of a flight using the GNS 530 For further details please refer to Sections 10 3 10 4 and 14 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 9 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Selecting COM and VLOC Frequencies While the GNS 530 is acquiring a position take a minute to dial in the active and standby frequencies to be used for the first phase of the flight The GNS 530 s display is divided int
227. ing HDG and ground speed Scheduler Displays reminder messages such as Change oil Switch fuel tanks Overhaul etc One time periodic and event based messages are allowed One time messages appear once the timer expires and reappear each time the GNS 530 is powered on until the message is deleted Periodic messages automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed Event based messages do not use a timer but rather a specific date and time Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer the active flight plan any stored flight plan a user waypoint or all user waypoints between two 400 500 series Garmin units in a dual unit installation See Section 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Options and information following in this section for details GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 4 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Flight Planning Page Fuel Planning Performing fuel planning operations 1 Select Fuel Planning from the Flight Planning Page using the steps described in Section 10 2 2 The current fuel planning mode is displayed at the top of the page POINT TO POINT or FPL for a flight plan To change the mode press the MENU Key to display the Fuel Planning Page Menu for the other mode then press the ENT Key to accept the other mode NOTE The Change Fields option above is only available on GNS 530 installations wh
228. inue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition 8 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Airport Departure Page Options The following option is available for the Airport Departure Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL Allows the pilot to load the selected departure into the active flight plan This is identical to loading a departure procedure from the Procedures Page as described in Section 6 1 Select Next FPL Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available departures for the next airport in the active flight plan Select Destination Apt This option is only available when a Flight Plan is active Allows the pilot to view the available departures for the active flight plan destination airport Loading a departure procedure from the Airport Departure Page 1 Select the desired departure runway and transition using the preceding steps 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Airport Departure Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key to select the Load into Active FPL option Figure 7 31 Figure 7 31 Airport Departure Page Menu 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press the FPL Key to return to the Airport Departure Page To select any of the other options from the Airport Arrival Page Menu follow the preceding steps but select the desired option in s
229. ion varies depending on the amount and complexity of the weather data being received The displayed NEXRAD data will reflect the highest intensity level sampled within a 2 x 2 km 4 sq km unit of area depending on available system memory GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 21 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES NEXRAD Intensity Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities reflectivity measured in dBZ decibels of Z Reflectivity designated by the letter Z is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver The dBZ values increase as returned signal strength increases Precipitation intensity is displayed on the GNS 530 units using colors represented by the dBZ values listed in Table 14 6 Display dBZ Rain inches hour Snow inches hour Source of NEXRAD Echo GDL 49 GDL 69 Atmos Cloud Rain Snow Sleet Hail lt 10 00 00 10 00 00 5 00 trace 0 00 trace 05 Very Light 5 00 trace 10 Light 10 0 trace 10 Light Light 15 01 1 2 Light Light 20 02 2 3 Light Light 25 05 3 5 Light Light Medium 30 09 5 7 Light Moderate Moderate 35 24 7 1 0 Moderate Heavy 40 48 gt 1 or sleet Heavy Heavy 45 1 25 gt 1 or sleet Heavy Heavy 50 2 5 sleet Intense 55 5 7 sleet
230. is blanked out at this point Figure 11 6 Target Altitude Message GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION 11 4 Vertical navigation messages can be turned on or off By default the messages are off Turning the messages off allows you to keep the profile settings you ve entered previously without having them generate messages when the feature isn t needed Disabling enabling the vertical navigation VNAV messages 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Vertical Navigation Page Options menu Figure 11 7 Figure 11 7 VNAV Page Options Menu 2 With VNAV Messages On highlighted press the ENT Key Or if the messages are already on and you wish to turn them off make sure VNAV Messages Off is highlighted and press the ENT Key Restoring the factory default VNAV settings 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Verti cal Navigation Page Options menu Figure 11 8 Figure 11 8 VNAV Page Options Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 1 SECTION 12 TERRAIN SECTION 12 TERRAIN NOTE GNS 530 units may display either a TERRAIN Page or a TAWS Page but not both depending upon the installed hardware and configuration Some earlier units are not equipped to support the TERRAIN and or TAWS functionality so the
231. ished holding patterns When OBS mode is active the GNS 530 allows the pilot to select the desired course to from a waypoint using the HSI much like a VOR and display a to from flag for the active to waypoint If an external course input is not available the pilot may select the OBS course on screen via a Select OBS Course pop up window With OBS mode cancelled the CDI always displays a TO indication for the next waypoint once the aircraft has crossed the active waypoint provided the active waypoint is not the last waypoint Refer to Section 6 2 for an example using the OBS Key One application for the OBS Key is holding patterns The OBS Key is used to suspend waypoint sequencing and select the desired course along the waypoint side of the hold For many approach operations setting and resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic Holding patterns that are part of an approach automatically disable waypoint sequencing then re enable waypoint sequencing after one time around the holding pattern A SUSP annunciation appears directly above the OBS Key Figure C 3 to indicate that automatic waypoint sequencing is temporarily suspended and course selection is not available If more than one trip around the holding pattern is desired press the OBS Key to again suspend waypoint sequencing An example of this operation is an approach which begins with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix IAF See Section 6 2
232. isual traffic avoidance it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance In other words the information provided by TIS is no better than that provided to ATC TIS only displays aircraft with operating transponders installed TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar which is a secondary surveillance radar similar to the ATCRBS TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering TIS is dependent on two way line of sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode S radar When the structure of the client aircraft GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 3 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES comes between the transponder antenna usually located on the underside of the aircraft and the ground based radar antenna the signal may be temporarily interrupted Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM Section 1 3 5 TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U S particularly in mountainous regions Also when flying near the floor of radar cov erage in a particular area intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs Therefore the surveillance information is approximately 5 seconds old In order t
233. ite Address www garmin com Visit the Garmin website for the latest updates and supplemental information concerning the operation of this and other Garmin products Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Garmin AutoLocate and PhaseTrac12 are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries and may not be used without the express permission of Garmin GNS and Spell N Find are trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries and may not be used without the express permission of Garmin NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen Inc December 2009 190 00181 00 Rev H Printed in the U S A GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H iii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 1 Accessories and Packing List
234. ity Alt TAS Winds Page The following menu options are available Fuel Planning When equipped with fuel flow FF and or fuel on board FOB sensors this option displays current fuel conditions along the active direct to or flight plan The pilot may also manually enter fuel flow ground speed GS and in some instances fuel on board figures for planning purposes Fuel planning figures can be displayed not only for the currently active flight plan or direct to but also point to point between two specified waypoints and for any programmed flight plan Fuel planning figures can be entered and displayed based upon one of three possible configurations No fuel sensors connected In this instance fuel flow is manually entered and is used to calculate fuel on board When fuel flow or fuel on board is manually entered the figures are retained the next time the page is displayed with fuel on board continuously recalculated GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 3 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Fuel flow sensor installed but no fuel on board sensor Fuel on board is manually entered Fuel flow is automatically provided by sensor If fuel flow is manually entered to override the sensor it does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time the page is displayed Fuel flow and fuel on board sensors installed Fuel flow and fuel on board are automati cally provided by
235. ivate a new approach for the same airport select the new procedure from the Procedures Page To view the Procedures Page press the PROC Key and turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach Press the ENT Key and turn the large right knob to highlight the new desired approach Press the ENT Key to select the approach then select the desired transition Finally highlight Activate at the bottom right corner of the screen and press the ENT Key to activate the new approach To activate a new approach to a different airport press the Direct to Key and select the desired airport using the small and large right knobs Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport See Section 6 1 for more information on selecting and activating approaches GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H I 1 INDEX A Abbreviations 7 5 7 7 7 9 7 16 7 17 7 18 16 9 Accessories 1 1 Activate Leg 5 10 5 15 C 4 Activate the approach 6 4 6 10 6 18 C 6 Activating Flight Plans 5 4 Active Flight Plan Options 5 8 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 Active frequency 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 5 6 27 6 33 9 1 9 2 Active leg 1 12 3 3 5 9 6 7 6 8 6 11 6 12 6 16 6 18 6 21 6 29 6 30 6 32 C 4 Airport Approach Page 7 5 7 7 7 10 7 11 7 12 C 1 Airport Frequencies 2 3 2 5 Airport Location Page 7 2 7 4 8 5 Airport Runway Page 7
236. ive Frequency Field Figure 8 8 Frequency Moved to Active Field 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Additional communication frequencies runway information and more are available from the Nearest Airport Page by highlighting the identifier of the desired airport and pressing the ENT Key Viewing additional information for a nearby airport 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired airport Figure 8 9 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 5 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Figure 8 9 Desired Airport Highlighted 4 Press the ENT Key to display the Airport Location Page for the selected airport 5 To view additional WPT pages for the selected airport including the Airport Runway Page and the Airport Frequency Page press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Turn the small right knob to display the additional WPT pages Figure 8 10 When finished press the small right knob to return the flashing cursor to the screen Figure 8 10 Additional WPT Page 6 To return to the Nearest Airport Page verify that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press the ENT Key or press the CLR Key 8 3 NEAREST INTERSECTION PAGE The Nearest Intersection Pa
237. ive only PT Part time frequency GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 9 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions the frequency is preceded by an Info designation Figure 7 13 Viewing usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Info designation directly to the left of the desired frequency Figure 7 16 Figure 7 16 Info Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key to display the restriction information Figure 7 17 Figure 7 17 Restriction Information Page 3 To return to the Airport Frequency Page press the ENT Key The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Frequency Page Type Usage type Public Heliport Military or Private Frequency Communication frequencies which may include restrictions Approach Arrival Class B Class C CTA Departure TMA Terminal TRSA Communication frequencies without restrictions ATIS ASOS AWOS Center Clearance Gate Control Ground Helicopter Multicom Pre taxi Radar Ramp Other Tower Unicom Navigation frequencies ILS LOC GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 10 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Airport Frequency Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Frequency Page by pressing the MENU Key Select Next F
238. l waypoints have been entered press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page Flight Plan Editing Adding a waypoint to an existing flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large right knob to select the point to add the new waypoint If an existing waypoint is highlighted the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Flight Plan Page 5 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the new waypoint Figure 5 6 and press the ENT Key Figure 5 6 Waypoint Identifier Field Selected 6 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Edited Flight Plan Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 5 3 SECTION 5 FLIGHT PLANS Deleting a waypoint from an existing flight plan 1 Press the FPL Key and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press the ENT Key 4 Turn the large right knob to select the waypoint to be deleted and press the CLR Key to display a
239. lect the NRST Page Group as indicated by NRST appearing in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired NRST Page Displaying a list of nearby airports 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group and if needed the small right knob to select the Nearest Airport Page Figure 1 25 Figure 1 25 Nearest Airport Page 2 To scroll through the list press the small right knob then turn the large right knob Figure 1 26 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 17 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Figure 1 26 Scrolling the Nearest Airport List Viewing additional information for a nearby airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airport from the list 3 Press the ENT Key to display waypoint WPT information pages for the selected airport Figure 1 27 Figure 1 27 Airport Location Page 4 To display runway and frequency information press the small right knob to remove the cursor and turn the small right knob to display the desired information page The Nearest Airport Page may be used in conjunction with the Direct to Key to quickly set a course to a nearby facility in an in flight emergency Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination overrides the flight plan or cancels a previously selected direct to destination The pilot still has the op
240. lect the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 135 portion of the frequency 135 325 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 325 portion of the frequency 135 325 NOTE The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor 4 To make the standby frequency the active frequency press the COM Flip flop Key Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Active Frequency of 135 325 The tuning cursor is normally in the COM Window To select a VOR Localizer ILS frequency press the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in the VLOC Window Additional instructions for VOR localizer ILS operations are available in Sections 6 and 9 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 3 SECTION 2 COM Auto Tuning The GNS 530 s auto tune feature allows the pilot to quickly select any database frequency in the GPS Window as the standby frequency Any COM frequency displayed in the GPS Window can be transferred to the standby COM frequency field The following are examples of selecting COM frequencies from some of the main GPS pages Selecting a COM frequency for a nearby airport 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group 2 Turn the small right knob to display the Nearest Airport Page Figure 2 5 3 Press the small right knob momentarily t
241. lect the desired option a Select DTK up to fix the top of the Map Display to the desired course b Select North up to fix the top of the Map Display to a north heading c Select Track up Figure 3 19 to adjust the top of the Map Display to the current track heading Figure 3 19 Orientation Window d Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option Figure 3 20 Figure 3 20 Map Setup Page To enable disable automatic zoom 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Auto Zoom field 4 Turn the small right knob to select On or Off 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts the map range from 2000 nm through each lower range stopping at 1 0 nm when approaching the destination waypoint GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 12 Enabling disabling the wind vector all background land data or all Jeppesen aviation data 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Setup Map and press the ENT Key 2 Turn the small right knob to select Map and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the appropriate field 4 Turn t
242. letter indicates the radius of the arc Either of the following may be done to intercept the arc for a DME arc approach Follow a specified radial inbound to intercept the IAF Follow ATC vectors which allow the pilot to intercept the arc at any point along the arc NOTE As this manual was being written the letter number DME arc names were being replaced with standard five letter intersection names Either naming convention may be used for an approach GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 14 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 32 Enroute Mode This example is based upon a flight from Hutchinson Kansas Municipal KHUT to Billard Municipal KTOP in Topeka Kansas The VOR DME runway 22 approach is selected along with D258G as the IAF refer to Figure 6 32 for the following steps 1 Select Billard Municipal KTOP as the destination via the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan Figure 6 33 Figure 6 33 Select Waypoint Page 2 Press the PROC Key and select the VOR 22 approach Figure 6 34 using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 From the Transitions Window select D258G as the IAF Also select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach Figure 6 34 Approach Window DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Billard Muni Topeka KS VOR o
243. lors relative to the aircraft altitude Range marking rings 1 nm 2 nm 5 nm 10 nm 25 nm 50 nm and 100 nm Heading Indicator The heading indication on the TAWS Page always displays TRK for Track up unless there is no valid heading Obstacles Potential Impact Points NOTE See Section 13 for a full description of TAWS functions Selectable Display Settings The TAWS Page has two selectable view settings 360 View View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on all sides Figure 3 34 120 View View of terrain ahead of and 60 to either side of the aircraft flight path TAWS Page Indication Figure 3 34 TAWS Page GPS derived MSL Altitude Red Terrain Warning Terrain Above or Within 100 Below Aircraft Altitude Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Display Range Black Terrain No Danger Terrain More than 1000 below Aircraft Altitude Yellow Terrain Caution Terrain Between 100 and 1000 Below Aircraft Altitude Displaying a 120 view 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key 2 Select View 120 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 35 TAWS Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key To switch back to a 360 view repeat step 1 select View 360 and press the ENT Key NOTE The TAWS Page gives a Track Up display orientation as in
244. lown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI Figure 6 4 GPS Designations Once an approach is selected it may be activated for navigation from the Procedures Page Activating the approach overrides the enroute portion of the active flight plan proceeding directly to the approach portion for a full approach directly to the initial approach fix Activating the approach also initiates automatic CDI scaling transition as the approach progresses Activating an approach 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page Figure 6 5 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Approach Figure 6 5 and press the ENT Key Figure 6 5 Procedures Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 3 Another Procedures Page option allows the pilot to activate the final course segment of the approach This option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to the final approach fix FAF and provides guidance to intercept the final course before reaching the FAF Activating the approach with vectors to final 1 Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Activate Vector To Final Figure 6 6 and press the ENT Key Figure 6 6 Procedures Page 3 A confirmation window will appear with Yes highlighted press
245. lt NAV Page DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION COASTAL ONE DEPARTURE CSTL1 CCC DEPARTING BARNES MUNI Fly assigned heading and altitude for radar vectors to HFD VOR Expect clearance to requested flight level 10 minutes after departure From over HFD VOR proceed via the HFD R 143 to Thumb Int then via the HTO R 010 to Yoder Int then via the CCC R 057 to CCC VOR Then via transition or assigned route Figure 5 57 Coastal One Departure Refer to Figure 6 57 for the following steps 1 Select the departure CSTL1 from the Procedures Page then select the departure runway RW02 in this example and transition GEDIC Refer to Section 6 1 for instructions on selecting departures 2 When departing the airfield NEXT DTK 026 appears along the bottom of the screen and SUSP appears directly above the OBS Key which indicates the aircraft is now on the course from fix to manual sequence leg The distance displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page the Default NAV Page Figure 6 58 and the Map Page is FROM the waypoint fix the departure runway in this example Figure 6 58 Waypoint Alert 3 Fly the outbound course When cleared to sequence to the next leg press the OBS Key Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS Key An alert NEXT DTK 185 appears along the bottom of the screen Figure 6 59 to provide guidance to the next waypoint HFD VOR The
246. mminent Terrain Impact ITI Advisory Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Caution FLASHING FLASHING Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Advisory Required Obstacle Clearance ROC Caution FLASHING FLASHING Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Advisory Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Caution FLASHING FLASHING Premature Descent Alert PDA Advisory Table 12 2 TERRAIN Alert Summary GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 6 SECTION 12 TERRAIN Table 12 3 shows system status annunciations that may also be issued Alert Type TERRAIN Page Annunciation Pop Up Alert TERRAIN System Test Fail None TERRAIN Alerting is disabled None No GPS position or excessively degraded GPS signal None System Test in progress None System Test pass None None Table 12 3 Additional System Annunciations Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA alert is used by TERRAIN and is composed of Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC These alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in Table 12 4 When an RTC or ROC alert is issued a potential impact point is displayed on the TERRAIN Page Imminent Terrain Impact ITI and Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI These alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of
247. mpact IOI These alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft s projected path ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Page The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Table 13 4 Phase of Flight Minimum Clearance Altitude Level Flight ft Minimum Clearance Altitude Descending ft Enroute 700 500 Terminal 350 300 Approach 150 100 Departure 100 100 Table 13 4 Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values for FLTA Alerts During the final approach phase of flight FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 nm of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the runway threshold GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 7 SECTION 13 TAWS Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert PDA is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway Figure 13 5 PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport PDA alerting ends when the air craft is either 0 5 nm from the runway threshold OR at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 nm of the threshold 700 600 500 400 300 200 100
248. n Too Low Terrain Altitude Callout 500 None None Five Hundred Excessive Descent Rate EDR Caution Sink Rate Negative Climb Rate NCR Caution or Don t Sink or Too Low Terrain Table 13 2 TAWS Alerts Summary Indicates the default configuration GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 6 SECTION 13 TAWS Table 13 3 shows system status annunciations that may also be issued Alert Type TAWS Page Annunciation Pop Up Alert Aural Message TAWS System Test Fail None TAWS System Failure TAWS Alerting is disabled None None No GPS position or excessively degraded GPS signal None TAWS Not Available TAWS Available is generated when sufficient GPS signal is re established System Test in progress None None System Test pass None None TAWS System Test OK Table 13 3 Additional System Annunciations Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA alert is used by TAWS and is composed of Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC These alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in Table 13 4 When an RTC or ROC alert is issued a potential impact point is displayed on the TAWS Page Imminent Terrain Impact ITI and Imminent Obstacle I
249. n an approach departure or arrival The GNS 530 allows the pilot to manually select any approach departure or arrival leg as the active leg of the flight plan This procedure is performed from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and pressing the Direct to Key twice then press the ENT Key to approve the selection Figure C 5 The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg so be sure to have clearance to that position See Section 5 2 Shortcuts for more information Figure C 5 Activate Leg Window How do I fly the GPS with an autopilot and DG heading bug If the installation does not have an HSI the pilot should make the course selections on the external CDI s OBS knob and the DG heading bug GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX C MAP DATUMS C 5 When does turn anticipation begin and what bank angle is expected The GNS 530 smooths adjacent leg transitions based upon a nominal 15 bank angle with the ability to roll up to 25 and provide three pilot cues for turn anticipation 1 A waypoint alert NEXT DTK flashes in the lower right corner of the screen 10 seconds before the turn point Figure C 6 Figure C 6 Waypoint Alert 2 A flashing turn advisory TURN TO appears along the bottom of the screen when the aircraft is to begin the turn Set the HSI to the next DTK value and begin the turn
250. n for three nearest airports with a scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicating which part of the list is currently being viewed The Nearest Airspace Page displays detailed information for up to three special use or controlled airspace alerts The NRST pages for VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints displays five waypoints at a time The flashing cursor and large right knob are used to scroll and view the rest of the waypoints or airspaces in the list Scrolling through the list of nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints or SUAs 1 Select the desired NRST page using the steps outlined on the preceding page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list The scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicates which part of the list is currently being viewed Figure 8 3 Figure 8 3 Nearest Airport Page Scroll Bar 4 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor The Nearest ARTCC Page and the Nearest FSS Page present detailed information for up to five nearby facilities displaying only one facility at a time Again the additional information is viewed using the flashing cursor and large right knob to scroll through the list Scrolling through the list of nearest flight service station or center points of communication 1 Select the desired NRST page using the steps outlined on the pre
251. n of meteorological events such as thunderstorms tornadoes and hurricanes An extensive network of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental United States Alaska and Hawaii The range of each NEXRAD station is 124 nautical miles NEXRAD Abnormalities There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images Some but not all of those include Ground clutter Spurious radar data Sun strobes when the radar antenna points directly at the sun Military aircraft deploy metallic dust chaff which can cause alterations in radar scans Interference from buildings or mountains which may cause shadows NEXRAD Limitations CAUTION NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long range planning purposes only Due to inherent delays and relative age of the data that can be experienced NEXRAD weather data cannot be used for short range avoidance of weather Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays Some but not all are listed for the user s awareness NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics hail vs rain etc NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges and has no information about storms directly over the site NEXRAD resolut
252. n sources including the information from other NAVAIDs visual sightings charts etc For safety purposes always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation CAUTION The GNS 530 display lens is coated with a special anti reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI REFLECTIVE COATING It is very important to clean the lens using a clean lint free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings CAUTION The Garmin GNS 530 does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot s authority to operate this device under FAA FCC regulations NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document including screen images of the GNS 530 panel and displays are subject to change and may not reflect the most current GNS 530 system Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Unless otherwise specified within this manual the term GNS 530 applies to the G
253. n the unit is not on the traffic page and the GTS issues a Traffic Advisory the Traffic Warning Window Figure 14 24 is displayed which shows a small thumbnail map When the Traffic Warning Window is displayed press the ENT Key to display the Traffic Page or press the CLR Key to return to the previous page NOTE The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed is less than 30 knots or when an approach is active Figure 14 25 Traffic Warning Window Map Page Traffic Banner A Traffic banner will be displayed in the lower right corner of the Map Page Figure 14 26 if the Display Range setting is beyond the Traffic Symbol setting Figure 14 27 and a Traffic Advisory is active Figure 14 26 Traffic Banner Traffic Advisory Banner Display Range Configuring Traffic Data on the Map Page Traffic is only displayed on the Map Page if aircraft heading data is available The Traffic Mode setting allows the operator to choose which traffic type is displayed all traffic traffic and proximity advisories or traffic advisories only The Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label settings determine the maximum ranges at which these items are displayed Configuring traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Setup Map 4 Press the ENT Key The flashing cursor highlig
254. nd Page Group Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Selecting the desired page group from any page Press and hold the CLR Key to select the Default NAV Page Turn the large right knob to select the desired page group Table 3 1 and Figure 3 1 Selecting the desired page within the group Turn the small right knob to select the desired page Figure 3 1 The bottom right corner of the screen is also used to display the GNS 530 s turn advisories Turn to 230 and waypoint alerts Next DTK 230 during flight plan and approach operations Figure 3 2 See Section 6 for more information Figure 3 2 Turn Advisory Turn Advisory GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 2 3 2 NAV PAGE GROUP The NAV Page Group includes five pages Figure 3 3 While viewing any NAV page turn the small right knob to select a different NAV page The pilot may find this selection process convenient to cycle between the Default NAV Page and the Map Page which are two of the most frequently used pages Other pages are provided for TAWS or TERRAIN information if configured for TAWS or TERRAIN to list frequencies for the flight plan and to display current satellite reception Figure 3 3 NAV Pages Default NAV Map TAWS or TERRAIN NAV COM Satellite Status NOTE Six or Seven NAV pages are ava
255. nd Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Page Groups Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 see Section 10 see Section 8 Table 1 1 Page Groups The bottom right corner of the screen Figure 1 14 indicates which page group Table 1 1 is currently being displayed the number of pages available within that group indicated by square icons and the placement of the current page within that group indicated by a highlighted square icon In addition to the NAV Page Group additional page groups are available for waypoint information WPT auxiliary AUX functions such as flight planning or unit settings and listings for nearest NRST airports or other facilities Figure 1 14 Current Page and Page Group Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Selecting the desired page group and page Turn the large right knob until a page from the desired page group is displayed Turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed NAV Pages There are five pages available under the NAV Page Group Default NAV Page Map Page TAWS Page NAV COM Page Satellite Status Page The Default NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page are used for most of the in flight navigation Selecting the NAV Page Group and displaying the Default NAV
256. nstrument Panel Self test Page displayed highlight OK and press the ENT Key NOTE The GNS 530 can hold up to nine checklists with up to 30 entries in each checklist GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 8 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Satellite Status Page The Satellite Status Page Figure 1 10 appears as the GNS 530 attempts to collect satellite information When an Acquiring status is displayed on the Satellite Status Page the signal strengths of any satellites received appear as bar graph readings This is a good indication that the unit is receiving signals and a position fix is being determined Following the first time use of the GNS 530 the time required for a position fix varies usually from one to two minutes Figure 1 10 Satellite Status Page If the unit can only obtain enough satellites for 2D navigation no altitude the unit uses the altitude provided by the altitude encoder if one is connected The INTEG annunciator bottom left corner of the screen indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built in integrity monitoring tests In the example above not enough satellites are being received to determine a position The Satellite Status Page shows the ID numbers for the satellites and the relative signal strength of each satellite received as a bar graph reading Searching Sky indicates that satellite almanac data is not ava
257. ntercept and fly the inbound course Figure 6 55 Waypoint Alert 6 When approaching PMD VOR the missed approach holding point an alert message in the lower right hand corner Figure 6 56 of the screen recommends the holding pattern entry procedure HOLD PARALLEL When flying the holding pattern a timer appears on the Default NAV Page The timer automatically resets on each outbound and inbound portion of the holding pattern Figure 6 56 Waypoint Alert 7 Note that the GNS 530 again displays SUSP above the OBS Key Automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended at the missed approach holding point A waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears along the bottom of the screen each time the aircraft approaches PMD VOR in the holding pattern 8 When leaving the holding pattern press the PROC Key to reactivate the approach or select a different approach or press the Direct to Key to select another destination GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 24 Course from fix to manual sequence legs appear on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Map Page with man seq in place of a waypoint identifier An example of this type of course leg appears in the COASTAL ONE DEPARTURE from Westfield Massachusetts Barnes Muni The example leg corresponds to the departure leg from Barnes Municipal and appears as in Figure 6 68 on the Active Flight Plan Page and the Defau
258. ntruder aircraft and maintain a safe separation in accordance with regulatory requirements and good operating practice If the flight crew cannot visually acquire the aircraft they should contact ATC to obtain any information that may assist concerning the intruder aircraft Based on the above procedures minor adjustment to the vertical flight path consistent with air traffic requirements are not considered evasive maneuvers TIS Limitations NOTE This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive Garmin recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual Section 1 3 5 TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory NOTE The main difference between TIS and TCAS is the source of surveillance data TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half second update rate while TIS uses the terminal Mode S ground interrogator and its Data Link to provide about a 5 second update rate The range accuracy of TIS and TCAS is similar While TIS is a useful aid to v
259. o place the cursor on the airport identifier field of the first airport in the list If needed turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport 4 The Nearest Airport Page displays the common traffic advisory frequency CTAF for each listed airport To select this frequency turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport s CTAF frequency Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Nearest Airport Page 5 Press the ENT Key to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM Window Displaying the entire list of frequencies for a nearby airport and selecting from that list 1 Start with the desired airport highlighted on the Nearest Airport Page as described in the preceding step 3 then press the ENT Key 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to remove the cursor and turn the small right knob to display the frequency list Figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 Airport Frequencies Page 3 Press the small right knob momentarily to reactivate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency 4 Press the ENT Key to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 4 SECTION 2 COM Selecting a COM frequency for a nearby flight service station FSS or center ARTCC 1 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST Page Group 2 Turn the small right knob to select the Nearest Center or Nearest Flight Serv
260. o present the intruders in a real time position the TIS ground station uses a predictive algorithm in its tracking software This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit Occasionally aircraft maneuvering causes this algorithm to induce errors in the GNS 530 display These errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector it lags intruder distance and altitude remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in see and avoid Some of the more common examples of these errors follow When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft course at a shallow angle either overtaking or head on and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 25 nm TIS may display the intruder on the wrong side of the client The preceding errors are relatively rare occurrences and are corrected in a few radar scans once the course has stabilized Users of TIS can render valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting their observations of undesirable performance Reporters should identify Time of observation Location type and identity of aircraft C
261. o separate windows or screen areas including a COM Window VLOC Window and the GPS Window Figure 1 12 Figure 1 12 Standby Frequency 135 325 MHz COM Window GPS Window VLOC Window Active Frequency Standby Frequency Changing the standby communication frequency 1 Press the small left knob if needed to move the tuning cursor to the COM Window Figure 1 12 2 Turn the large left knob to select the MHz and the small left knob to select the kHz of the desired frequency Placing the standby communication frequency in the active field Press the COM Flip flop Key Figure 1 13 Figure 1 13 Active Frequency 135 325 MHz Once the active frequency has been entered repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter the standby frequency After both communication frequencies have been entered the COM Window may be kept hot by leaving the cursor on the standby frequency Move the cursor to the VLOC Window by pressing the small left knob NOTE When selecting VLOC frequencies the tuning cursor automatically returns to the COM Window after 30 seconds of inactivity Changing the standby VLOC frequency 1 Press the small left knob if needed to activate the tuning cursor in the VLOC Window 2 Turn the large left knob to select the MHz and the small left knob to select the kHz of the desired frequency Placing the standby frequency in the active field Press the NAV Flip flop Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide a
262. oach fix FAF If a lower CDI scale setting is selected i e 1 0 nm or 0 3 nm the higher scale settings are not selected during any phase of flight For example if 1 0 nm is selected the GNS 530 uses this for the enroute and terminal phase and ramp down to 0 3 nm during an approach Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM protection limits listed in Table 10 2 follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding modes Figure 10 30 CDI Scales CDI Scales and Corresponding Flight Phases Oceanic Enroute Terminal Approach for each scale phase to be available Selected CDI must be set to 5 00nm GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 20 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES CDI Scale Flight Phase RAIM Protection Auto oceanic 4 0 nm 5 0 nm or Auto enroute 2 0 nm 1 0 nm or Auto terminal 1 0 nm 0 3 nm or Auto approach 0 3 nm Table 10 2 CDI Scales An auto ILS CDI selection allows the GNS 530 to automatically switch the external CDI from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver when established on the final approach course Section 6 3 Or select manual to manually switch the external CDI connection as needed An arrival alarm provided on the CDI Alarms Page may be set to notify the pilot with a message when the aircraft has reached a user defined distance to the final destination the direct to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
263. occurs no pilot action is required if enough satellites are available for a 3D position fix provided no RAIM warnings are present However if only a 2D position fix is possible the pilot should maintain the GPS altitude within 1 000 feet of pressure altitude by entering the altitude on the Position Page No basemap data available The GNS 530 has detected a failure in the built in basemap land data memory Land data does not appear on the Map Page Other unit functions continue to work normally however the GNS 530 should be taken to a Garmin dealer for service at the earliest convenience Not receiving input data on 429 Channel 1 No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel 1 connection for a period exceeding five seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer Not receiving input data on 429 Channel 2 No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel 2 connection for a period exceeding five seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer Not receiving input data on 232 Channel 1 No data has been received on the RS 232 channel 1 connection for a period exceeding ten seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by a Garmin dealer GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 6 OBS key stuck The OBS Key is stuck in the enabl
264. ondition observed Type of transponder processor and software in use Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel rather than ATC it is suggested that malfunctions be reported in the following ways By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station FSS facility By FAA Form 8000 7 Safety Improvement Report a postage paid card designed for this purpose These cards may be obtained at FAA FSS s General Aviation District Offices Flight Standards District Offices and General Aviation Fixed Based Operations GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 4 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TIS Audio Alerting The TIS audio alert is generated when the number of Traffic Advisories TA on the GNS 530 display increases from one scan to the next Limiting TAs only reduces nuisance alerting due to proximate aircraft For example when the first TAs appears on the TIS display the user is alerted audibly As long as a single aircraft remains on the TIS display no further audio alert is generated If a second or more TAs appears on the display a new audio alert is sounded If the number of TAs on the TIS display decreases and then increases a new audio alert is sounded A TIS audio alert is also generated when TIS service becomes unavailable The volume pitch and duration of the audio alert including the choice between a male or female voice is configured d
265. or a flight plan leg To change the leg mode press the MENU Key to display the Flight Planning Page Menu for the other leg mode then press the ENT Key to accept the other leg mode 3 For point to point trip planning turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the from waypoint Once the waypoint s identifier is entered press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Figure 10 14 Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint OR 4 For flight plan leg trip planning turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan already stored in memory by number Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field Figure 10 15 and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply trip planning calculations to the entire flight plan GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 6 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight the departure time DEP TIME field Figure 10 8 Figure 10 8 Departure Time Field Highlighted 6 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the departure time Press the ENT Key when finished Departure time may be entered in local or UTC time depending upon unit settings see Section 10 4 Setup Page Date Time 7 The flas
266. or the request the WPT field is displayed in place of Position The WPT field is used to enter a waypoint identifier as the reference point for the request From Lat Lon Request NEXRAD data from a specific latitude and longitude This is only selectable when requesting from the map The Position field displays the position of the map cursor and cannot be edited From Flight Plan Request NEXRAD data from one of the waypoints in the active flight plan This is only selectable when an active Flight Plan has been selected The Flight Plan field displayed in place of Position is used to select which waypoint in the active flight plan to use as the reference point for the request Radius This field selects a request radius from 50 to 250 nautical miles from the selected position Position also WPT or Flight Plan Current Posn Position is current Look Ahead Position is look ahead position From ID Position is from the ID entered into the WPT field Flight Plan is the ID selected from the active flight plan GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 23 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Auto Request GDL 49 Only This field is used to set the time interval for the GDL 49 to automatically send a NEXRAD data request The time options are OFF 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 45 min and 1 hour When an auto request tim
267. ormation supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive TAWS Alerting TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine TAWS alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 2 SECTION 13 TAWS TAWS utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level MSL Using the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude TAWS displays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TAWS c
268. osition may be in error beyond the limits allowed for the current phase of flight Cross check the position with an alternate navigation source If the warning occurs during a final approach segment FAF to MAP execute the published missed approach Scheduler message user entered text The user entered scheduler message time has expired and the scheduler message is displayed Searching the sky The GNS 530 is searching the sky for GPS satellite almanac data or the GPS receiver is in AutoLocate Mode Allow the unit to complete data collection approximately five minutes before turning it off Select appropriate frequency for approach The aircraft is inbound and within 3 nm of the FAF and the active VLOC frequency does not match the published frequency for the approach Tune the standby VLOC frequency to the proper frequency and press the VLOC Flip flop Key to activate the frequency Select auto sequence mode The OBS Key was pressed disabling auto sequencing of waypoints in a flight plan or instrument procedure The OBS Key should be pressed again to enable auto sequencing because 1 no destination waypoint has been selected or 2 the GPS receiver cannot currently determine its position GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 7 Select VLOC on CDI for approach The aircraft is inbound and within 3 nm of the FAF and the
269. otification of product updates new products and provides for lost or stolen unit tracking Have the serial number of the GNS 530 available and connect to the website www garmin com Look for the product registration link on the home page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 2 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 KEy AND KNOB FUNCTIONS The GNS 530 is designed to make operation as simple as possible The key and knob descriptions Figure 1 1 provide a general overview of the primary function s for each key and knob The takeoff tour Section 1 3 is intended to provide a brief overview of the primary functions of the GNS 530 Figure 1 1 Keys and Knobs 4 2 6 5 1 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 3 7 8 9 12 13 19 COM Flip flop 1 Large left knob 6 ENT enter 11 MSG message 16 COM Power Volume 2 RNG map range 7 Small right knob 12 17 FPL flight plan VLOC Flip flop 3 Direct to 8 Large right knob 13 18 VNAV VLOC Volume 4 MENU 9 CDI 14 19 PROC procedures Small left knob 5 CLR clear 10 OBS 15 Experiment with the unit and refer to the reference sections for more information Data is entered using the large and small knobs Experiment with them to become efficient at entering data This greatly reduces the amount of time spent operating the GNS 530 in flight GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 3
270. ours minutes and seconds Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 15 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES 5 To stop the generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight Stop and press the ENT Key 6 To reset the generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Press the CLR Key followed by the ENT Key Recording or resetting the departure time 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 10 3 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Departure Time The reset mode field indicates Pwr on or GS gt 30kt 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired reset mode Figure 10 21 Pwr on records a departure time when the GNS 530 is turned on GS gt 30kt records a departure time once the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots Figure 10 21 Departure Reset Mode Window 4 Press the ENT Key when finished 5 To reset the departure time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset and press the ENT Key Viewing using or resetting total trip time 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Total Trip Time Figure 10 22 The reset mode field indicates
271. ourse to the selected destination Section 4 9 MENU Key Displays a context sensitive list of options This options list allows the pilot to access additional features or make settings changes which relate to the currently displayed page 10 CLR Key Used to erase information remove map detail or to cancel an entry Press and hold the CLR key to immediately display the Default NAV Page 11 ENT Key Used to approve an operation or complete data entry It is also used to confirm information during power on 12 Small Right Knob Used to select pages within one of the page groups Press this knob momentarily to display the on screen cursor The cursor allows the pilot to enter data and or make a selection from a list of options When entering data the small right knob is used to select the desired letter or number and the large right knob is used to move to the next character space The small right knob is also used to move the target pointer up turn clockwise or down counterclockwise when the map panning function is active 13 Large Right knob Used to select page groups NAV WPT AUX or NRST With the on screen cursor enabled the large right knob allows the pilot to move the cursor about the page The large right knob is also used to move the target pointer right turn clockwise or left counterclockwise when the map panning function is active GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1
272. ow highlight the desired frequency and press the ENT Key Some listed frequencies may include designations for limited usage as follows TX Transmit only RX Receive only PT Part time frequency If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions the frequency is preceded by an Info designation Viewing usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Info designation directly in front of the desired frequency Figure 3 45 Figure 3 45 Info Highlighted 2 Press the ENT Key to display the restriction information Figure 3 46 Figure 3 46 Restriction Information Page 3 To return to the NAV COM Page press the ENT Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 23 3 8 SATELLITE STATUS PAGE The Satellite Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions including current satellite coverage GPS receiver status and position accuracy The Satellite Status Page Figure 3 47 is helpful in troubleshooting weak or missing signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites a signal strength bar appears for each satellite in view with the appropriate satellite number 01 32 underneath each bar The status of satellite reception is shown as follows No signal strength bars
273. p Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page Figure 6 28 Default NAV Page 10 When crossing the IAF SUSP appears above the OBS Key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is temporarily suspended As the aircraft turns inbound SUSP is cancelled and the GNS 530 returns to automatic sequencing NOTE If the pilot needs to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding pattern again press the OBS Key to manually suspend waypoint sequencing BEFORE crossing the holding waypoint the second time If this waypoint has already been passed re activate the holding pattern using the steps described in Section 6 2 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 12 Figure 6 29 Approach Mode DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 29 for the following steps 11 When approaching BODRY intersection a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 209 appears along the bottom of the screen 12 At 2 0 nm from the FAF DEPOY intersection the GNS 530 switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection 13 When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 209 appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 30 Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP Figure 6 30 Final Approach 14 Af
274. peed minimum safe altitude and track See Section 16 3 for descriptions of these and other navigation terms Changing a data field 1 From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields Figure 3 24 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 24 Map Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the data field to be changed 3 Turn the small right knob to select the type of data Figure 3 25 desired to appear on this field and press the ENT Key Figure 3 25 Select Data Field Window 4 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor NOTE The on screen traffic information occupies two data fields leaving room to display only two additional data types Traffic information is only available when the GNS 530 installation includes connection to traffic information sources See Section 14 Additional Features Restoring Factory Settings Restore Defaults resets all four user selectable data fields to their original factory default settings Restoring the factory default settings From the Map Page Menu turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults Figure 3 26 and press the ENT Key Figure 3 26 Map Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 15 3 5 TERRAIN PAGE NOTE GNS 530 units may display either a TERRAIN Page or a TAWS Page but not both depending upon the installed hardware and configur
275. plan Once the aircraft has reached the set distance up to 99 9 units an Arrival at waypoint message is displayed The Airspace Alarms fields allow the pilot to turn the controlled special use airspace message alerts on or off This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspace Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Map Page It simply turns on off the warning provided when approaching or near an airspace An altitude buffer is also provided which expands the vertical range above or below an airspace For example if the buffer is set at 500 feet and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above or below an airspace the pilot is not notified with an alert message if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above or below an airspace and projected to enter it the pilot is notified with an alert message The default is 200 feet Units Position Allows the pilot to configure the displayed data to standard or metric units of measure This setting applies to distance speed altitude fuel pressure and temperature Also provides three magnetic variation heading options True Auto or User defined If Auto is selected all track course and heading information is corrected to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver The True setting references all information to true north and the User setting corrects information to an user entered value Configuration settings fo
276. point List displays a list of all user waypoints currently stored in memory Delete User Waypoint Allows the pilot to delete the selected waypoint from memory Crossfill Allows the pilot to transfer a user waypoint to another 400 500 series unit if installed Please refer to Sections 5 1 and 10 1 for detailed information on crossfill Viewing a list of all user waypoints 1 From the User Waypoint Page press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight View User Waypoint List Figure 7 44 and press the ENT Key Figure 7 44 User Waypoint Page Menu 3 The top of the User Waypoint List indicates the total number of user waypoints currently used and available memory If more user waypoints are stored than can be displayed on a single screen turn the large right knob to scroll through the User Waypoint List GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 23 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 4 Press the small right knob to return to the User Waypoint Page Deleting a user waypoint 1 Select the desired waypoint on the User Waypoint Page and press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Delete User Waypoint Figure 7 45 and press the ENT Key Figure 7 45 User Waypoint Page Menu 3 Press the CLR Key to display a delete waypoint confirmation window 4
277. ponds to the initial phase of the missed approach which reads Climb to 5000 outbound via PMD VOR R 282 Refer to Figure 6 53 for the following steps 1 After crossing the MAP press the OBS Key The missed approach sequence is automatically offered starting with the course from fix to altitude leg The NEXT DTK 282 alert appears along the bottom of the screen 2 Note that within a few seconds of pressing the OBS Key to release suspend mode and start the approach sequence SUSP re appears above the OBS Key as the GNS 530 returns to suspend mode Figure 6 54 This is normal when flying a course from fix to altitude leg and indicates that automatic leg sequencing is suspended Figure 6 54 SUSP Annunciation 3 Fly the outbound course The Map Page depicts the flight path extending indefinitely from PMD VOR The distance DIS on the Default NAV Page the Map Page and the Active Flight Plan Page increases indicating the distance back to PMD VOR 4 Upon reaching the desired altitude 5000 press the OBS Key to return to automatic leg sequencing Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS Key GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 23 5 An alert NEXT DTK 119 appears providing guidance to the inbound course Figure 6 55 The actual desired track DTK depends on ground speed and distance from PMD VOR I
278. pproach Remember VLOC is required for the final course segment from final approach fix FAF to MAP If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS by 2 0 nm prior to the FAF the pilot must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by pressing the CDI Key Verify that VLOC is displayed directly above the CDI Key Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS localizer SDF and LDA approaches Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse approaches When flying an approach with the autopilot coupled the pilot must monitor system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI or HSI switches to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to capture and track the approach course Switching to VLOC late in the approach may not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach course prior to the FAF depending upon the performance characteristics of the autopilot and aircraft In such cases the pilot should manually fly the approach or refer to the documentation provided with the autopilot GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 33 When an ILS approach is first selected and loaded or activated the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the standby field In order to fly the final course segment of the ILS approach the pilot must place the ILS frequency in t
279. pproach mode is not activated for precision approaches since the VLOC receiver must be used for primary navigation Figure 6 70 CDI Scale Transition Figure 6 71 Final Approach Flagstaff DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Refer to Figure 6 71 for the following steps 12 When approaching SHUTR a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 210 appears along the bottom of the screen 13 After crossing SHUTR the destination sequences to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold Fly toward the MAP When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 31 14 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 72 Figure 6 72 Waypoint Alert 15 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 73 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A FROM indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence Figure 6 73 SUSP Annunciation NOTE In addition to using
280. proach with vectors to final Figure 6 44 This allows the GNS 530 to provide guidance to the final approach course GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 19 Figure 6 44 Procedures Page 3 ATC instructs the pilot to turn left to a heading of 025 This places the aircraft parallel to the final approach course in the opposite direction CDI needle deflection is to the left 4 ATC instructs the pilot to turn right to a heading of 115 5 ATC instructs the pilot to turn right to a heading of 175 to intercept the final approach course When converging with the final approach course the needle moves toward the center In Figure 6 45 the needle has not yet returned to the on screen CDI since the current position is still 1 7 nm right of the final approach course Figure 6 45 CDI Moves Toward Center DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 46 Approach Mode Refer to Figure 6 46 for the following steps 6 At 2 0 nm from the FAF TOP VOR the GNS 530 switches from terminal mode to approach mode Figure 6 47 CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection Figure 6 47 Approach Mode 7 When approaching the FAF a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 214 appears in the lower right corner GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 20 8 When crossing the FAF
281. procedure turn The GNS 530 does not provide guidance through the turn The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV Page and the Active Flight Plan Page 9 After approximately one minute make a turn to intercept the ILS The GNS 530 sequences to the inbound leg and NEXT DTK 210 appears along the bottom of the screen CDI coupling automatically switches from the GPS receiver to the VLOC Figure 6 69 receiver as the pilot completes the inbound turn If the ILS frequency has not been activated per step 4 this automatic CDI switching does not occur Figure 6 69 Switches to VLOC 10 Turn to track the ILS approach course NOTE From this point on primary navigation is provided by the VLOC receiver The pilot may continue to use the GPS receiver for supplemental navigation guidance only ALSO when using an external CDI not an HSI expect reverse sensing when flying outbound on the approach course or when flying a backcourse approach GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 30 11 When approaching the FAF SHUTR 0 30nm appears in the lower left corner of the screen Figure 6 70 indicating a CDI scale transition from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection This scale transition applies only to the Default NAV Page s on screen CDI since the external CDI or HSI is now coupled to the VLOC receiver GPS a
282. procedure turn itself beyond what is required for any other type of approach Figure 6 8 Sample Approach with Procedure Turn 4 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Lynchburg VA Regional VOR or GPS Rwy 03 This example uses the VOR Runway 04 approach for Lynchburg Virginia Regional Airport KLYH and assumes a departure from Frederick Maryland Municipal Airport KFDK GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 5 The steps required to set up and fly the approach are detailed below refer to Figure 6 8 for the following steps 1 Prior to departing KFDK the destination KLYH is selected using the Direct to Key or by creating a flight plan terminating at Lynchburg Regional 2 While enroute to KLYH select the ATIS frequency from the list on the NAV COM Page Section 3 6 and Figure 6 9 and place it in the standby field of the COM Window Use the COM Flip flop Key to make the ATIS frequency active Figure 6 9 NAV COM Page 3 Press the PROC Key Figure 6 10 and select the VOR 04 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 Figure 6 10 Procedures Page 4 From the Transitions Window Figure 6 11 select LYH VOR the IAF Also select Load to load but not activate the approach Figure 6 11 Approach and Transitions Windows 5 Press the PROC Key select Activate Approach and press the ENT Key to activate the
283. r The Activate function field is highlighted Figure 1 17 Figure 1 17 Activate Highlighted 6 Press the ENT Key to activate a direct to course to the selected destination Once a direct to destination is selected press and hold the CLR Key to display the Default NAV Page Default NAV Page During most flights the Default NAV Page the Map Page and the NAV COM Page are the primary pages used for navigation Selecting the Default NAV Page Press and hold the CLR Key Figure 1 18 Figure 1 18 Default NAV Page Course Deviation Indicator CDI User Selectable Data Fields all four corners Active Leg of Flight Plan or Direct to Destination The Default NAV Page Figure 1 18 displays a graphic course deviation indicator CDI the active leg of the flight plan as defined by the current from and to waypoints and four user selectable data fields The default settings for these fields are desired track DTK distance to waypoint DIS ground speed GS and estimated time enroute ETE See Section 16 3 for definitions of these navigation terms GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 13 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Changing the data fields 1 From the Default NAV page press the MENU Key and select Change Fields Figure 1 19 Figure 1 19 Default NAV Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to select the data field to be changed 3
284. r GPS Rwy 22 Figure 6 35 Terminal Mode GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 15 Refer to Figure 6 35 for the following steps 3 Within 30 nm of KTOP the GNS 530 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 4 If the approach has not yet been activated in step 2 above do so when cleared for the approach Figure 6 36 Figure 6 36 Procedures Page 5 When approaching the IAF D258G a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 353 appears along the bottom of the screen As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 353 6 Follow the arc when the course select setting and desired track differ by more than 10 a Set course to message appears on the Message Page Figure 6 37 Figure 6 37 Message Window 7 The next point in the approach is an intermediate fix labeled D025G When approaching this intermediate fix a waypoint alert NEXT DTK 205 appears along the bottom of the screen As the distance to this fix approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory TURN TO 205 Dial this course into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob 8 At 2 0 nm from the FAF TOP VOR the GNS 530 switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 nm full scale deflection
285. r Instruments to verify these Indications Fuel Capacity is entered manually Fuel On Board and Fuel Flow are Provided by Sensors if Installed Select to Set Fuel Level to Full Capacity Select to display Checklists Page Should Match Current OBS Course Selection Instrument Panel Self test Page Once the database has been acknowledged the Instrument Panel Self test Page appears Figure 1 6 To ensure that the GNS 530 and any connected instruments are working properly check for the following indications on the CDI HSI RMI external annunciators and other connected instruments Course deviation Half left no flag TO FROM flag TO Bearing to destination 135 Distance to destination 10 0 nm All external annunciators if installed On Glideslope Half up no flag Time to destination 4 minutes Desired track 149 5 Ground speed 150 knots The Instrument Panel Self test Page indicates the currently selected OBS course fuel capacity CAP fuel on board FOB and fuel flow FF The fuel capacity fuel on board and fuel flow may be manually entered if the installation does not include connection to sensors which automatically provide these figures Entering fuel capacity fuel on board or fuel flow figures if not provided by sensors 1 Turn the large right knob to select the Fuel Capacity Fuel on Board or Fuel Flow field 2 Turn the sm
286. r forms of traffic TIS traffic does not require heading data to be valid on the map The only difference between TIS and other traffic data occurs on the Traffic Page If heading is available then the traffic data is compensated and displayed as heading up If it is not available the Traffic Page is a track up display It is labeled on the upper portion of the Traffic Page Figure 14 5 Traffic Page Mode Selection Field Heading or Track Up Indicator GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 6 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES TIS Traffic Display Status and Pilot Response AGE If traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds an age indicator e g AGE 00 12 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display when displaying traffic See Figure 14 6 After another 6 seconds if data is still not received the traffic is removed from the display The pilot should be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this condition Figure 14 6 Traffic Age Indicator and Coasting Banner Traffic Coasting Banner and Age Indicator DATA FAIL DATA FAIL is displayed when data is being received from GTX 330 Figure 14 7 but there was a failure detected in the data stream The pilot should see the installer for corrective action Figure 14 7 Data Fail Message FAILED FAILED is displayed when the GTX 330 has indicated it has failed Figure 14
287. r key is stuck The remote VLOC transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance VLOC transfer key stuck The VLOC Flip flop Key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the VLOC Flip flop Key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact a Garmin dealer for assistance Waypoint already exists The name just entered for a user waypoint already exists in memory Waypoint s have been replaced One or more user waypoints were updated during a unit to unit crossfill operation Waypoint memory is full The pilot has used all 1000 user waypoint locations in the GNS 530 s memory Delete unwanted waypoint to make room for new entries GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 9 16 2 ABBREVIATIONS The following is a list of abbreviations used on the GNS 530 and their meanings ACTV Active ALT Altitude APPRCHING Approaching APR Approach APT Airport ARSPC Airspace ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center ARVL Arrival AUX Auxiliary AVGAS Aviation Grade Gasoline AVTN Aviation BARO Barometric Pressure BRG Bearing To C Degree Celsius C V COM VLOC CAS Calibrated Airspeed CDI Course Deviation Indicator CLR Clear COM Communic
288. r position format are also provided and the map datum setting is shown The map datum used in the GNS 530 is WGS 84 Note that a map datum that does not match the charts can result in significant differences in position information When using the paper charts for reference only the GNS 530 still provides correct navigation guidance to the waypoints contained in the database regardless of the datum differences Date Time Provides settings for time format local or UTC 12 or 24 hour and time offset The time offset is used to define current local time UTC also called GMT or Zulu date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed To use local time simply designate the offset by adding or subtracting the correct number of hours GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 21 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Display Backlight Allows the pilot to adjust the display for optimum viewing in any condition Automatic backlighting is available which uses a built in photocell at the top left corner of the display bezel to make the proper display adjustments without any user intervention The pilot may also select manual control of the display contrast and backlighting of the GNS 530 s display Nearest Airport Criteria Defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the Nea
289. r satellites is scheduled to be out of service per FAA AC 90 100 U S Terminal and En Route Area Navigation RNAV Operations Prior to departure the operator must use the FDE Prediction Program supplied with the 500 Series Trainer Software Figure 15 2 to demonstrate that there are no outages in the capability to navigate on the specified route of flight the FDE Prediction Program determines whether the GPS constellation is robust enough to provide a navigation solution for the specified route of flight The trainer software and the document 400 500 Series FDE Prediction Instructions 190 00643 00 are available on Garmin s website www garmin com for free download Figure 15 2 Garmin 500 Series Trainer Software GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 1 SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS AND NAV TERMS 16 1 MESSAGES The GNS 530 uses a flashing MSG annunciator at the bottom of the screen directly above the MSG Key to alert the pilot of any important information or warnings While most messages are advisory in nature warning messages may require pilot intervention When the MSG annunciator flashes press the MSG Key to display the message Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous page The following is a list of available messages and their meanings Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes
290. r time e g gallons per hour FOB fuel on board The total amount of usable fuel on board the aircraft GS ground speed The velocity the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position HDG heading The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro IND indicated Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation in the aircraft panel e g indicated altitude LFOB left over fuel onboard The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of a one or more legs of a flight plan or a direct to LRES left over fuel reserve The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of a one or more legs of a flight plan or a direct to expressed in time and based upon a known fuel consumption flow rate MSA minimum safe altitude Uses Grid Minimum Off route Altitudes Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the present position Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one degree longitude in size and clear all reference points within the grid by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference point is 5000 feet MSL or lower If the highest reference point is above 5000 feet the Grid MORA will clear the highest reference point by 2000 feet TKE track angle error The angle difference between the desired track and the current track An arrow indicates the proper direction to
291. racking up to 45 Mode A C S intruders The GTS 820 850 is capable of tracking up to 45 Mode A C plus 30 Mode S intruders Up to 30 of the most threatening targets are displayed GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 13 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Pilots should be aware of TAS TCAS system limitations If an intruder transponder does not respond to interrogations due to antenna shading or marginal transponder performance it will not be displayed or display may be intermittent Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times when using TAS TCAS systems for non transponder equipped airplanes or unresponsive airplanes TCAS I Surveillance Volume Top and bottom mounted antennas allow an active surveillance range of up to 12 nm GTS 800 or 40 nm GTS 820 850 in the forward direction and somewhat reduced ranges to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation patterns Interference limiting in GTS 820 850 units may automatically reduce range in high density traffic areas TA Alerting Conditions The GTS 8XX automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level Table 14 5 to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports Sensitivity Level A less sensitivity TA is used when the aircraft s radar altimeter if equipped indicates own altitude is less than 2000 feet AGL If no radar altimeter is present Sensitivity Level A
292. raft Symbol Other Intruder Traffic Symbol Traffic Advisory TA Symbol Traffic Ground Track Vector Figure 14 3 Out of Range TA Symbol Out of Range Traffic Advisory TA Symbol GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 5 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Figure 14 4 Altitude Trend and Deviation Altitude Deviation Altitude Trend Traffic Type Description Traffic Advisory TA This symbol solid yellow circle is generated when an intruder aircraft approaches on a course that projects to intercept defined by a 0 5 nm horizontal radius and a relative altitude of 500 ft the pilot s current course within 34 seconds Out of Range Traffic Advisory This solid yellow half circle appears under the same conditions and has the same urgency as a TA Its appearance differs from the TA only to signify that the intruder is outside of the current range of the Traffic Page Other Traffic Symbol This symbol hollow white diamond represents traffic detected within the selected display range that does not meet the criteria for a TA May be configured as cyan Traffic Ground Track The target track vector is a short line displayed in 45 increments The vector protrudes from each target symbol in the approximate direction of travel Table 14 2 TIS Options Traffic Page TIS Traffic data is displayed on the Traffic Page Figure 14 5 and the Map Page Unlike othe
293. rcraft operations with six to nine passenger seats FAR Parts 91 223 135 154 TAWS functionality is an available feature found in GNS 530 TAWS units with main software version 6 01 or above along with appropriate hardware upgrades TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft Operating Criteria TAWS requires the following to operate properly The system must have a valid 3 D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain obstacle airport terrain database Limitations NOTE The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displayed caution and warning alerts are advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain TAWS uses terrain and obstacle inf
294. rd database change the data card is missing or the data card has failed FPL waypoint moved The position data for one or more flight plan FPL waypoints moved at least 0 33 arc minutes in the current NavData card database change FPL waypoint was deleted At least one flight plan FPL waypoint is no longer available when a new NavData card was installed database change G S has failed The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service G S is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the glideslope receiver has failed Operational status of the glideslope receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service G S needs service The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at the earliest convenience to a Garmin dealer for service GPS has failed The GNS 530 has detected a failure in its GPS receiver The GPS receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for service GPS is not responding Internal system to system communication between the main processor and the GPS receiver has failed Operational status of the GPS receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to a Garmin dealer for serv
295. rd Municipal KTOP as the destination using the Direct to Key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC Key and select the VOR 22 approach using the steps outlined in Section 6 1 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 18 3 From the Transitions Window select D258G as the IAF Also select Load 4 When cleared press the PROC Key and select Activate Vector To Final Figure 6 42 Figure 6 42 Procedures Page Flying the Vectors Approach With vectors to final selected the CDI needle remains off center until the aircraft is established on the final approach course With the approach activated the Map Page displays an extension of the final approach course in magenta magenta is used to depict the active leg of the flight plan and VTF appears as part of the active leg on the Default NAV Page as a reminder that the approach was activated with vectors to final DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 43 Terminal Mode In this example assume ATC vectors result in a rectangular course to intercept final as follows refer to Figure 6 43 for the following steps 1 Within 30 nm of KTOP the GNS 530 switches from enroute mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 5 0 to 1 0 nm full scale deflection 2 If the approach has not already been activated activate the ap
296. rd and are available using the PROC procedures Key To display the Procedures Page Figure 1 23 press the PROC Key Figure 1 23 Procedures Page The steps required to select and activate an approach departure or arrival are identical This introductory section shows examples of the steps required to select an approach but keep in mind the same process also applies to departures and arrivals Selecting an approach departure or arrival 1 Turn the large right knob to select the desired option Select Approach Select Arrival or Select Departure from the Procedures Page 2 Press the ENT Key to display a list of available procedures for the arrival when using approaches or STARs or departure when using SIDs airport 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key 4 For approaches a window appears Figure 1 24 to select the desired initial approach fix IAF or provide a vectors option to select just the final course segment of the approach Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key The vectors option extends the final inbound course beyond the final approach fix allowing the pilot to intercept the final course segment beyond its normal limits Figure 1 24 Approach Window 5 For departures and arrivals a window appears to select the desired transition Turn the small right knob to select the
297. re 3 38 Figure 3 38 TAWS Page Menu 2 Press the ENT Key The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the TAWS annunciator field when TAWS is inhibited Figure 3 39 Annunciator Field Figure 3 39 TAWS Annunciator Field Enabling TAWS 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key Enable Terrain is selected by default 2 Press the ENT Key The TAWS system is functional again GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 20 TAWS Manual Test Garmin TAWS provides a manual test capability which verifies the proper operation of the aural and visual annunciations of the system prior to a flight Manually testing the TAWS system 1 Select the TAWS Page and press the MENU Key 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Test Terrain option Figure 3 40 Figure 3 40 TAWS Page Menu 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection TER TEST is annunciated in yellow on the TAWS Page One of the following aural messages is played giving the test results TAWS System Test OK if the system passes the test TAWS System Failure if the system fails the test NOTE TAWS system testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 kts so as not to impede TAWS alerting TAWS Symbols NOTE See Section 13 2 for a complete description of TAWS symbology The following symbols Figure 3 41 are used to represent obst
298. refore will not have a TERRAIN or TAWS page available 12 1 INTRODUCTION Garmin TERRAIN is a non TSO C151b certified terrain awareness system incorporated into GNS 530 units to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain CFIT TERRAIN functionality is a standard feature found in GNS 530 units with main software version 6 01 or above along with appropriate hardware upgrades Operating Criteria TERRAIN requires the following to operate properly The system must have a valid 3 D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain obstacle airport terrain database Limitations NOTE The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data TERRAIN displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid t
299. rest Airport Page A minimum runway length and or surface type may be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed The default settings are 0 feet or meters for runway length and any for runway surface type Data Field Configuration Allows the pilot to select what type of data is displayed in the data field directly below the VLOC Window Available data options are VOR LOC data or a configurable data field to display information such as ground speed track or distance to destination If the GNS 530 is interfaced with a traffic information device see Section 14 thumbnail traffic can be configured for display in the data field COM Configuration Allows the pilot to select 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing NOTE 8 33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States Select the 25 0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States Setup Page CDI Alarms Setting the airspace warning messages or changing the altitude buffer 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the On Off field next to the desired airspace type MOAs amp Other Airspace includes military operation alert caution danger training and warning areas
300. rom the Flight Planning Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the method field Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual Figure 10 13 Auto automatically transfers any selection of or any change to a direct to destination or active flight plan to a second 400 500 series Garmin unit Figure 10 13 Crossfill Method Window NOTE Crossfill requires both 400 500 series units to have the same Jeppesen NavData database cycle number 3 The flashing cursor highlights the transfer data option TRANSFER field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available data options Figure 10 14 Figure 10 14 Transfer Window Active Flight Plan Transfer the active flight plan to from a second 400 500 series Garmin unit in a dual unit installation This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the Active Flight Plan Page Flight Plan Transfer any stored flight plan to from a second 400 500 series unit by selecting the flight plan by number This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the Flight Plan Catalog Page See also Section 5 1 Flight Plan Catalog Page Options User Waypoints all Transfer all stored user waypoints to from a second 400 500 series unit User Waypoint Transfer the specified user waypoint to a second 400 500 series unit GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and
301. rrent Page Target Altitude and Altitude Reference AGL or MSL Target Distance from reference Vertical Speed Desired Vertical Speed Required GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION 11 2 Creating a vertical navigation profile 1 Press the VNAV Key to display the Vertical Navigation Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 With the TARGET ALTITUDE field highlighted Figure 11 3 turn the small and large right knobs to select the target altitude and press the ENT Key Figure 11 3 Target Altitude Selected 4 Turn the small right knob to select Above Wpt AGL or MSL and press the ENT Key Above Wpt uses the altitude of a destination airport as stored on the Jeppesen NavData card MSL lets you set a specific target altitude for any waypoint category airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint 5 Turn the small and large right knobs to select a distance from the target reference waypoint and press the ENT Key If the target altitude should occur at the target reference waypoint enter a distance of zero 6 Turn the small right knob to select Before or After Figure 11 4 and press the ENT Key This setting designates whether the offset distance defines a point before you reach the target reference waypoint or after you reach the waypoint Figure 11 4 Position Window 7 When
302. rspace near and ahead appears If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will not take it inside of the air space the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears If the aircraft has entered an airspace the message Inside airspace appears Figure 1 29 Nearest Airspace Page By default airspace alert messages are turned off When turned on the message MSG annunciator located directly above the MSG Key flashes to alert the pilot to the airspace message See Section 10 4 Setup Page Airspace Alarms for information on enabling airspace alert messages Viewing an airspace alert message 1 Press the MSG Key The Messages Page appears with the alert message Figure 1 30 Figure 1 30 Messages Page 2 Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous display Note that the airspace alerts are based upon three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace Additional information about a nearby airspace such as controlling agency frequency and floor ceiling limits is available from the Nearest Airspace Page Section 8 9 Viewing additional airspace information 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airspace from the list 3 Press the
303. s Kilograms Liters or Pounds 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired units of measure for the selected category Press the ENT Key to accept the selection GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 25 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Changing the position format 1 Select Units Position from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Position Format field Figure 10 37 Figure 10 37 Position Format Window 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired position format The following position formats are available hddd mm mmm Latitude and longitude in degrees and decimal minutes hddd mm ss s Latitude and longitude in degrees minutes and decimal seconds MGRS Military Grid Reference System UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic grids 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected format Displaying the map datum 1 Select Units Position from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The WGS 84 map datum is displayed Figure 10 38 this field cannot be changed Figure 10 38 Units Position Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 10 26 SECTION 10 AUX PAGES Setup Page Date Time Displaying local time or UTC 1 Select Date Time
304. s 4 and 5 until the facility name or location is selected then press the ENT Key 7 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 3 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Duplicate Waypoints Once the identifier facility name or location is entered all six airport pages display information for the selected airport When entering an identifier facility name or location the GNS 530 s Spell N Find feature scrolls through the database displaying those waypoints matching the characters that have been entered to that point If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob during the selection process If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier a Duplicate Waypoint Window appears when the identifier is selected by pressing the ENT Key Selecting a facility name or location where duplicate entries exist 1 Select the desired facility name or location following the preceding steps under To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 2 When spelling the facility name or location using the small and large right knobs the GNS 530 s Spell N Find feature selects the first entry Figure 7 4 in the database based upon the characters entered up to that point Figure 7 4 First Facility for Charlotte 3 Continue turning the small right
305. s Position from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 The flashing cursor highlights the heading mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired heading mode Auto True or User Figure 10 35 Press the ENT Key to accept the selection The heading modes are described at the beginning of this section Figure 10 35 Heading Mode Window 3 If User is selected the flashing cursor moves to the user value field to the immediate right of User Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired magnetic variation direction and value Press the ENT Key when finished Changing the units of measure 1 Select Units Position from the Setup Page using the steps described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired units of measure category Figure 10 36 Figure 10 36 Temp Units Window The following categories and corresponding units of measure are available DIS SPD Distance and speed in Nautical nautical miles knots Statute miles miles per hour or Metric kilometers kilometers per hour terms ALT VS Altitude and vertical speed in Feet feet per minute Meters meters per minute or Meters meters per second PRESSURE Barometric pressure in Inches or Millibars TEMP Temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit FUEL Fuel units in Gallons Imperial Gallon
306. s described at the beginning of this section 2 Turn the small right knob to select an option from the Auxiliary Configuration Window Figure 10 43 The following options are available VOR LOC Data Displays the identifier distance and radial from the tuned VOR station active in the VLOC window When tuned to a nearby localizer the localizer identifier associated air port and runway are displayed instead Configurable Data Fields Displays a user select able data field of navigation data see Table 10 3 for available options Traffic Watch If the GNS 530 is connected to other equipment providing traffic alert informa tion a window is provided to display traffic information This allows traffic monitoring from any page to quickly identify traffic hazards Figure 10 43 AUX Configuration Window NOTE The Traffic selection in the Auxiliary Configuration Field is only available if the GNS 530 is configured for interface with a traffic information device see Section 14 3 Press the ENT Key to accept the data type 4 If Configurable Data Fields is selected a second selection field appears Turn the large right knob to highlight this second field then turn the small right knob to display a list of available navigation data types Table 10 3 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data type and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection Abbreviation Data
307. s of left to right Figure 14 14 Non Bearing TA Banner Non Bearing Traffic Advisory Banner The TA annunciation The distance in miles 1 5 from the client aircraft s present position to the intruder aircraft A or symbol indicating whether the intruder aircraft is above or below the client aircraft The difference in altitude 04 shown in hundreds of feet between the intruder aircraft and the client aircraft An up or down arrow indicating that the intruder aircraft is climbing or descending at a rate greater than 500 fpm Traffic Page Display Range Various display ranges can be selected for optimal display of TIS traffic information Changing the display range on the Traffic Page Press the RNG Key to zoom through the range selections which are 12 6 nm 6 2 nm and 2 nm Map Page TIS traffic is displayed on the Map Page Figure 14 15 in addition to the Traffic Page When a Traffic Advisory is active the Traffic Banner is displayed in the lower right corner of the Map Page Figure 14 15 Map Page Displaying Traffic Traffic Advisory Banner GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 9 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Configuring TIS traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU key Turn the small right knob to select Setup Map and pres
308. s the ENT Key 3 The flashing cursor highlights the GROUP field Turn the small right knob to select Traffic Figure 14 16 and press the ENT Key Figure 14 16 Map Setup Window 4 Turn the large right knob to select the desired Traffic Mode option Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key Repeat the step for Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label 5 Press the CLR Key to return the Map Page The traffic mode selection menu allows the user to choose from the following All trfc All traffic is displayed on the Map Page TA PA Only traffic and proximity advisories are displayed on the Map Page proximity advisories are not applicable to TIS configuration TA only Only traffic advisories are displayed on the Map Page Thumbnail Traffic on Map Page The Map Page can display traffic in a thumbnail format in any of the top three data fields on the right side of the Map Page Displaying Thumbnail Traffic on the Map Page 1 Turn the small right knob to select the Map Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu 3 Turn the small right knob to select Change Fields and press the ENT Key 4 Select one of the top three configurable fields Select TRFC from the Select Field Type List and press the ENT Key Note that the thumbnail range defaults to 6 nm and cannot be changed Figure 14 17 Figure 14 17 Thumbnail Traffic on Map P
309. sensors Fuel on board can NOT be entered manually Fuel flow can be entered manually but does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time the page is displayed Trip Planning Allows the pilot to view desired track DTK distance DIS estimated time enroute ETE enroute safe altitude ESA and estimated time of arrival ETA information for a direct to point to point between two specified waypoints or for any programmed flight plan This option also displays the sunrise sunset times for your destination waypoint for the selected departure date NOTE Point to point waypoints flight plans and or ground speed default is current GPS calculated ground speed entered on the Fuel Planning Page automatically transfers to the Trip Planning Page and vice versa Density Alt TAS Winds Indicates the theoretical altitude at which the aircraft can perform depending upon several environmental conditions including indicated altitude IND ALT barometric pressure BARO and total air temperature TAT the temperature including the heating effect of speed read on a standard outside temperature gauge This menu option computes true airspeed TAS based upon the factors above and the calibrated airspeed CAS Also this menu option determines winds aloft the wind direction and speed and a head wind tail wind component based upon the calculated density altitude DEN ALT true airspeed aircraft head
310. splayed as solid white may be configured as cyan diamonds PAs are defined as traffic within the 6 0 nm range within 1200 ft of altitude separation and are not a traffic advisory TA Other Traffic Symbol The hollow white may be configured as cyan diamond represents traffic detected within the selected display range that does not meet the criteria for a TA or a PA and does not pose an immediate collision threat Table 14 4 TAS TCAS Symbology System Description The GNS 530 provides an optional display interface for the GTS 8XX Traffic Advisory TAS and Traffic Collision Avoidance TCAS I Systems The GTS 800 and GTS 820 are TAS systems the GTS 850 is a TSO Certified TCAS I system The GTS 8XX uses active interrogations of Mode A C S GTS 820 and GTS 850 only and Mode A C transponders to provide Traffic Advisories to the GNS 530 The GTS 8XX is an active traffic advisory system that operates as an aircraft to aircraft interrogation device The GTS 8XX monitors the airspace surrounding an aircraft and advises the flight crew where to look for transponder equipped aircraft that may pose a collision threat When the GTS 8XX receives replies to its interrogations it computes the responding aircraft s range bearing relative altitude and closure rate The GTS 8XX then determines the advisory status of the target and sends the location information and alert status to the GNS 530 for display The GTS 800 is capable of t
311. ss the ENT Key Figure 3 7 Default NAV Page Menu Dual Unit Considerations A Crossfill option is also provided for the Default NAV Page This option transfers a direct to destination or flight plan to a second Garmin 400 or 500 Series unit See Section 10 2 Flight Planning Page Crossfill for additional details on using the crossfill option Auto Zoom An auto zoom feature is available for the Default NAV Page which automatically adjusts from an enroute scale of 200 nm through each lower scale stopping at 5 0 nm as you approach your destination waypoint By default the auto zoom feature is disabled Enabling or disabling the auto zoom feature 1 From the Default NAV Page press the MENU Key to display the options menu Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Default NAV Page Menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Enable Auto Zoom or Disable Auto Zoom 3 Press the ENT Key to select this option GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 3 NAV PAGES 3 6 3 4 MAP PAGE The second NAV page is the Map Page Figure 3 9 which displays the present position using an airplane symbol along with nearby airports NAVAIDS user defined waypoints airspace boundaries lakes rivers highways and cities Figure 3 9 Map Page Present Position Desired Track Map Range Map Display Current Page Group Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current
312. subsidiaries
313. t Create New Flight Plan and press the ENT Key 5 The cursor appears on the first waypoint identifier field located directly below WAYPOINT Use the large and small right knobs to enter the identifier of the first waypoint in the flight plan The small knob is used to select the desired letter or number and the large knob is used to move to the next character space 6 Press the ENT Key once the identifier has been selected The cursor moves to the next blank waypoint identifier field GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 20 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 above until all waypoints for the flight plan have been entered Figure 1 34 Figure 1 34 Enter Flight Plan Waypoints Once the flight plan is created it may be activated from the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu Activating the flight plan places it into flight plan 00 a copy of it still resides in the original catalog location and replaces any flight plan which currently exists in flight plan 00 Activating the new flight plan 1 Press the MENU Key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu 2 Turn the small right knob to select Activate Flight Plan Figure 1 35 and press the ENT Key Figure 1 35 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 2 1 SECTION 2 COM SECTION 2 COM 2 1 COMMUNICATING USING THE GNS 530 The
314. t s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 1 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES SECTION 8 NRST PAGES 8 1 NRST PAGE GROUP Section 3 1 introduced the GNS 530 s main page groups Table 8 1 NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group This fourth page group NRST provides detailed information for the nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints within 200 nm of the current position In addition the NRST pages Figure 8 1 include the five nearest Flight Service Station FSS and center ARTCC FIR points of communication plus alerts the pilot to any nearby Special Use SUA or Controlled Airspaces Table 8 1 Page Groups Page Groups NAV Group WPT Group AUX Group NRST Group see Section 3 see Section 7 see Section 10 8 NRST pages Figure 8 1 NRST Pages NRST Airport NRST Intersection NRST NDB NRST VOR NRST User NRST ARTCC NRST Flight Service NRST Airspace Quickly selecting a NRST page 1 From any page press the NRST Key NRST appears along the bottom of the screen see Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Nearest Airport Page 2 Turn the small right knob to select the desired NRST page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 2 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Not all nine nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding NRST page at one time The Nearest Airport Page displays detailed informatio
315. t is abeam the hold waypoint The timer again resets as the aircraft turns inbound within approximately 30 of the inbound course This allows the pilot to use standard timing typically one minute to fly the inbound and outbound legs of the hold Figure 6 23 Hold Teardrop Annunciation 4 The GNS 530 provides course guidance only on the inbound side of the holding pattern When leaving the holding pattern to re fly the approach or another approach press the PROC Key to Select Approach or Activate Approach as previously described Or use the Direct to Key to select another destination GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 10 Flying an Approach with a Hold Starting where the previous example left off assume weather conditions resulted in a missed approach at Lynchburg Regional The pilot has decided to divert to Farmville Regional KFVX instead refer to Figure 6 24 for the following steps DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Figure 6 24 Approach with Hold 1 Press the Direct to Key 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the destination airport s identifier KFVX 3 Press the ENT Key twice This time the pilot selects the GPS runway 21 approach into Farmville Regional The GPS runway 21 approach begins with a holding pattern at the IAF BODRY intersection 4 Press the PROC Key and select the GPS 2
316. t the desired arrival GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 13 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Figure 7 24 Arrivals Window 4 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field 5 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Figure 7 25 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition Figure 7 25 Transitions Window 6 Press the ENT Key The cursor moves to the runway field 7 Turn the small right knob to display a window of available runways Figure 7 26 Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired runway NOTE ALL may appear in the runway field indicating the arrival procedure applies to all runways For airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the arrival procedure applies to both runways Figure 7 26 Runway Window 8 Press the ENT Key To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 14 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES Airport Arrival Page Options The following options are available for the Airport Arrival Page by pressing the MENU Key Load into Active FPL Allows the pilot to load the selected arrival into the active flight plan This is identical to loading an arrival procedure from the Procedures Page as described in Section 6 1 Select Next FPL
317. ta Data Received Message GDL 49 Only When the request has been answered the message annunciator MSG flashes to alert the pilot to one of the following messages depending on the type of data received New NEXRAD Received New Graphic METAR Received New Text METAR Received GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 24 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Displaying NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page To display NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page 1 Select the NAV Weather Page Figure 14 33 using the small and large right knobs When the GNS 530 is configured with the Data Link interface the Weather Page is the third page in the NAV Page Group it is the fourth page if a traffic sensor is also configured Figure 14 33 NEXRAD Data on Weather Page 2 Press the small right knob The upper left hand corner field flashes 3 Turn small right knob and select NEXRAD 4 Press the small right knob Customizing NEXRAD Data on the Weather Page The pilot can customize the NEXRAD data on the Weather Page from the Page Options Menu Customizing the NEXRAD data on the Weather Page 1 From the Weather Page press the MENU Key to display the NAV Weather Page Options Menu 2 Select from the following options to customize the NEXRAD data View 120 View 360 There are two viewing options available each shown relative to the position of the aircraft When
318. ten exclusively for 500 Series units that are configured with the GDL 49 or GDL 69 A Data Link Satellite Receiver Refer to the 400 500 Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00140 10 when interfacing with non Garmin products Introduction GNS 530 units can interface with the GDL 49 or the GDL 69 69A The GNS 530 unit provides the display and control interface for the textual and graphical weather data link Satellite up linked textual and graphical weather data is received by the GDL 49 on a request reply basis Transmissions are made using bursts of compressed data at a rate of 4800 bps Weather data transmissions are streamed directly to the GDL 69 69A from the XM Satellite Radio network The following operational differences are noted between the GDL 69 69A and the GDL 49 GDL 49 NEXRAD and METAR data is collected by the National Weather Service and disseminated to Meteorlogix a weather information provider This data is then delivered to a weather server in the Echo Flight Message System With the weather data on the system an incoming customer request is filled logged and turned around for delivery to ORBCOMM in less than five seconds ORBCOMM is a provider of global messaging services using a constellation of 26 low Earth orbiting satellites The message is relayed from the satellites to the GDL 49 aboard the aircraft Once the GDL 49 receives the message it is displayed on the GNS 53
319. tep 3 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 16 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 8 INTERSECTION PAGE The Intersection Page Figure 7 32 displays the latitude longitude region and country for the selected intersection The Intersection Page also displays the identifier radial and distance from the nearest VOR VORTAC or VOR DME Intersections may only be selected by identifier as described in Section 7 1 Figure 7 32 Intersection Page Intersection Identifier and Symbol Region Country Nearest VOR and Symbol Radial and Distance from Nearest VOR Latitude Longitude Position Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS RAD Radial from nearest VOR in degrees magnetic or degrees true depending upon unit configuration DIS Distance from nearest VOR in nautical miles statute miles kilometers depending upon unit configuration NOTE The VOR displayed on the Intersection Page is the nearest VOR not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection 7 9 NDB PAGE The NDB Page displays the facility name city region country latitude and longitude for the selected NDB Figure 7 33 The NDB Page also displays the frequency and a wea
320. ter crossing the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate When viewing the Map Page note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP Do not follow this extended course Instead follow published missed approach procedures 15 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner Figure 6 31 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 6 PROCEDURES 6 13 Figure 6 31 Final Approach 16 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key indicating that auto matic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined in this section Flying a DME Arc Approach The GPS overlay for a DME arc approach uses additional Jeppesen provided waypoints to define the arc These waypoints are indicated by D as the first letter in the waypoint name This is followed by three numbers which indicate the radial the waypoint lies on The last
321. that are set within TAWS software algorithms TAWS alerts typically employ either a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level or both When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed Aural alerts are simultaneously issued Annunciations appear in a dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display Figure 13 2 Annunciations are color coded according to Table 13 2 Figure 13 2 TAWS Annunciation Field TAWS Annunciation Field Pop up terrain alerts Figures 13 3 amp 13 4 can also appear during an alert but only when the TAWS Page is not displayed There are two options when an alert is displayed Press the CLR Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and returns to the currently viewed page Press the ENT Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and accesses the TAWS Page NOTE To further capture the attention of the pilot TAWS issues aural voice messages that accompany visual annunciations and pop up alerts Figure 13 3 Caution Alert Pop up Figure 13 4 Warning Alert Pop up NOTE Alerts with multiple messages see Table 13 2 are configurable at installation and are installation dependent NOTE TAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a yellow background TAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white text on a red background GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 13 5 SECTION 13 TAWS Table 13 2 shows the possible TAW
322. the cursor and highlight OPER 2 Turn the small right knob to select STBY 3 Press the ENT Key to confirm Flight Procedures Once the aircraft is airborne determined by system configuration at the time of installation the system switches from standby mode to operating mode The GNS 530 unit displays OPER in the upper right hand corner of the display and begins to display traffic on the Traffic or Map Page The TIS Traffic Advisory TA should alert the crew to use additional vigilance to identify the intruding aircraft Any time the traffic symbol becomes a yellow circle or a voice warning is announced conduct a visual search for the intruder If successful maintain visual contact to ensure safe operation See TIS Traffic Display Status and Pilot Response in this section for a list of TIS display messages and respective pilot responses After Landing Once the aircraft is on ground determined by system configuration at the time of installation the system switches from operating mode to standby mode The GNS 530 unit displays STBY As described previously both the standby and operating modes can be manually overridden by the display controls GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 12 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 14 2 GTS 8XX TRAFFIC SySTEMS Introduction All information in this section pertains to the display and control of the Garmin GNS 530 GTS 8XX inter
323. the ENT Key In many cases it may be easiest to Load the full approach while still some distance away enroute to the destination airport Later if vectored to final use the steps above to select Activate Vector To Final which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active Otherwise activate the full approach using the Activate Approach option 6 2 NON PRECISION APPROACH OPERATIONS The GNS 530 provides non precision approach guidance using its built in GPS receiver The GPS receiver can also be used as a supplemental aid for precision approaches and for non precision localizer based approaches but the localizer and glideslope receivers must be used for primary approach course guidance Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often very simple and don t require overflying a VOR or NDB Many non precision approaches have GPS overlays to let the pilot fly an existing procedure VOR VOR DME NDB RNAV etc more accurately using GPS Many overlay approaches are complex in comparison to GPS only approaches The GNS 530 displays and provides guidance through each leg of the approach automatically sequencing through each of these legs up to the missed approach point MAP Approaches may be flown as published with the full transition using any published feeder route or initial approach fix IAF or may be flown with a vectors to final transition NOTE The following approac
324. the MENU Key is pressed the alternate selection is shown Use this option to switch between a radar like 120 display of the data and the default 360 display Request NEXRAD Request METAR This option is a link to either the NEXRAD or METAR Request Pages depending on which is currently displayed on the Weather Page Display Legend This option is a link to the Weather Legend Page See the Weather Legend Page paragraph following in this section GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 25 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Displaying NEXRAD Data on the Map Page When NEXRAD data is received it is displayed on the Map Page in addition to the Weather Page and the Default NAV Page Customizing NEXRAD Data on the Map Page The pilot can customize NEXRAD data on the Map Page by using the Page Menu Customizing the Map Page 1 Go to the Map Page in the NAV Page Group 2 Press the MENU Key and select Setup Map from the page menu 3 Select Weather from the GROUP field in the Map Setup window Figure 14 34 Figure 14 34 Map Setup Window 4 Highlight the NEXRAD Symbol field and use the small right knob to set the desired map range at which to overlay NEXRAD data The range values are Off to 2000 nm miles Press the ENT Key for the desired range selection Press the CLR Key to go back to the Map Page 5 Highlight the NEXRAD Density field use th
325. the current satellite connection See Table 14 8 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 34 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES SAT ID CONNECTIVITY FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION _ _ _ RS 232 communication with the GDL 49 has been lost Data Link has failed There is a disconnect inside the GDL 49 Linked to sat Can exchange data with the satellite Satellite in view Found satellite but have not yet identified it Searching No satellite is currently in view Table 14 8 Sat ID Connectivity Field SATCOM Operation This field indicates the current activity being performed by the satellite communicator within the GDL 49 Table 14 9 lists the messages that can be displayed including interpretations of the most common ones SATCOM OPERATION FIELD MESSAGE DESCRIPTION _ _ _ Unknown task is being performed or RS 232 communication with the GDL 49 has been lost Idle Waiting to perform the next task Receiving message Receiving a response from the satellite Sending message Transmitting a message Sending request Transmitting a request to the satellite Table 14 9 SATCOM Operation Field SATCOM SER NUM This field shows the serial number assigned to the GDL 49 s internal satellite communicator GDL SW This field shows the currently installed software version for the GDL 49 The GDL 69
326. the destination sequences to the MAP RW22 9 When approaching the MAP a waypoint alert APPRCHING WPT appears in the lower right corner 10 After crossing the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS Key Figure 6 48 indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do not follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS Key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined in this section Figure 6 48 SUSP Annunciator Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs Certain approach departure and arrival procedures in the Jeppesen database contain course from fix flight plan legs The GNS 530 is able to load these legs into the flight plan along with the rest of the procedure data and provide navigation along these legs There are three different types of course from fix legs Course from fix to distance or Course from fix to DME distance Course from fix to altitude Course from fix to manual sequence Course from fix to distance legs appear in the flight plan like normal waypoints but the destination name al ways begins with a D followed by a distance in nm from the waypoint fix DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Palmdale CA AF Plant 42 VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25
327. the pilot to important warnings and requirements See Section 16 1 for more information on messages 17 FPL Key Allows the pilot to create edit activate and invert flight plans as well as access approaches departures and arrivals A closest point to flight plan feature is also available from the FPL Key See Section 5 for more information on flight plans 18 VNAV Vertical Navigation Key Allows the pilot to create a three dimensional profile which provides guidance to a final target altitude at a specified location See Section 11 19 PROC Key Allows the pilot to select and remove approaches departures and arrivals from the flight plan When using a flight plan available procedures for the departure and or arrival airport are offered automatically Otherwise the pilot may select the desired airport then the desired procedure GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 5 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 TAKEOFF TOUR Overview The Garmin GNS 530 provides the pilot accurate navigational data and communication capability along with non precision and precision approach certification in the IFR environment The takeoff tour is designed to familiarize the pilot with Powering up the unit Changing frequencies Entering data Performing a simple direct to Selecting IFR procedures Using some limited flight plans In addition this section briefly covers the D
328. the small right knob a target pointer flashes on the map display Figure 14 29 Also a window appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer and the bearing and distance to the pointer from the present position Selecting the panning function and panning the map display 1 Press the small right knob to activate the panning target pointer Figure 14 29 Figure 14 29 Panning the Map Display 2 Turn the small right knob clockwise to move up or counterclockwise to move down 3 Turn the large right knob clockwise to move right or counterclockwise to move left 4 To cancel the panning function and return to the present position press the small right knob When the target pointer is placed on traffic the traffic range and altitude deviation are displayed Figure 14 29 The traffic is identified as TA Traffic Advisory TRFC Other Traffic PA Proximity Advisory GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 19 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES 14 3 WEATHER DATA LINK INTERFACE This section is written for Garmin 500 Series Main System Software Version 6 01 and later GDL 49 Main Software Version 2 03 and later GDL 69 69A Main Software Version 2 14 and later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions NOTE This section is writ
329. ther broadcast indication if applicable As mentioned in Section 7 1 NDBs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city Figure 7 33 NDB Page NDB Identifier and Symbol Facility Name City and Region Country Frequency and Weather Broadcast Indication Latitude Longitude Position Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Symbol See Section 3 4 for a graphic illustration of available NDB symbols Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in kilohertz kHz Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s frequency GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 17 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 7 10 VOR PAGE The VOR Page Figure 7 34 displays the facility name city region country magnetic variation latitude and longitude for the selected VOR The VOR Page also displays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication if applicable Figure 7 34 VOR Page Magnetic Variation VOR Identifier and Symbol Facility Name City and Region Country Frequency and Weather Broadcast Indication Latitude Longitude Position Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group
330. ther phases of flight non precision approach terminal enroute The FDE functionality for non oceanic flight phases adheres to the same missed alert probability false alert probability and failed exclusion probability specified by N8110 60 Figure 15 1 shows satellite number 9 exclusion during oceanic phase of flight No message notifying the user of exclusion appears In addition to the EPE and DOP fields there is the Horizontal Uncertainty Level HUL field which displays a 99 confidence level that the aircraft position is within a circle with a radius of the value displayed in the HUL field Oceanic Mode Excluded Satellite Checkered Pattern Horizontal Uncertainty Level Figure 15 1 Satellite Status Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 15 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION 15 2 15 2 PRE DEPARTURE VERIFICATION OF FDE Since FDE is based upon the exclusion of bad satellites it is necessary to ensure there will be an adequate number of satellites in the GPS constellation that are still able to provide a navigation solution An FDE prediction must be performed prior to departure for a flight involving Oceanic Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole source of navigation per FAA Notice 8110 60 U S Area Navigation RNAV routes Standard Instrument Departures SIDs or Standard Terminal Arrival Routes STARs if a NOTAM indicates a GPS satellite o
331. tic variation 7 17 Main page groups 8 1 10 1 Manual sequence 6 20 6 24 MAP 4 1 6 3 Map datum 10 18 Map Direct To 3 8 Map orientation 3 10 3 11 Map Page 1 11 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 10 3 14 4 5 6 7 6 8 6 12 6 16 6 18 6 22 6 29 7 18 7 20 10 20 16 5 Map page options 3 10 Map Panning 3 8 Map range 1 2 1 3 1 11 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 11 Map setup 3 7 Max speed 10 16 Measurement units 1 5 10 18 10 20 10 23 10 24 MENU Key 1 3 Messages 1 4 1 18 3 23 8 14 10 3 10 7 10 8 10 21 10 22 16 1 Message Page 1 8 1 18 2 5 METAR 14 19 14 36 METAR Graphics 14 36 Missed approach 4 1 6 3 6 8 6 13 6 16 6 20 6 23 6 31 6 32 16 6 C 1 C 4 C 5 C 6 Mode S 14 1 MSA minimum safe altitude 3 4 16 10 16 13 MSG Key 1 4 N NAVAID v 3 10 16 10 NAV COM page 1 10 1 13 1 14 1 16 2 4 3 21 3 22 6 5 NavData card 1 6 1 15 A 1 A 2 Navigation terms 1 11 1 12 3 14 16 12 NAV Page Group 1 5 2 4 3 2 NDB 1 11 1 16 3 6 6 3 7 2 7 5 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 21 8 3 8 6 16 10 Nearest NRST Pages 1 16 Nearest airport criteria 10 21 10 27 10 28 Nearest Airport Page 1 16 1 17 2 3 8 2 8 3 8 4 10 21 Nearest airspace 1 16 Nearest Airspace Page 8 11 Nearest ARTCC 1 16 2 4 8 8 Nearest ARTCC Page 8 8 Nearest FSS 1 16 8 2 8 9 Nearest FSS Page 8 9 Nearest Intersection Page 1 16 8 5 Nearest NDB Page 1 16 8 6 Nearest User Waypoint Page 1 16 8 8 Nearest VOR Page 1 16 8 6 NEXRAD 14 19 14 26
332. tifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the facility name second line or the city third line field Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Facility Name Highlighted 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the facility name or city location of the desired destination waypoint Figure 4 6 When spelling the facility name or city the GNS 530 s Spell N Find feature selects the first entry in the database based upon the characters entered up to that point Figure 4 6 Facility Name Selected 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through any additional database listings for the selected facility name or city The pilot can also scroll backwards with the small right knob if the desired waypoint has been scrolled past 5 Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint and press the ENT Key again to activate the direct to function GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 3 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Selecting a Destination from the Active Flight Plan When navigating an active flight plan any waypoint contained in the flight plan may be selected as a direct to destination from the Select Direct to Waypoint Page See Section 5 for more information on flight plans Selecting a direct to destination from the active flight plan 1 Press the Direct to Key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlig
333. tion of returning to the flight plan by cancelling the direct to see Section 4 1 Cancelling Direct to Navigation Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination from the Nearest Airport Page 1 From the Nearest Airport Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airport from the list 3 Press the Direct to Key 4 Press the ENT Key 5 Press the ENT Key again to navigate to the nearby airport Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination from an Airport Information Page 1 Press the Direct to Key 2 Press the ENT Key Figure 1 28 Figure 1 28 Direct To Waypoint Page 3 Press the ENT Key again to navigate to the nearby airport GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 1 18 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Nearest NRST Airspace Page The last page in the NRST group the Nearest Airspace Page Figure 1 29 provides information for up to nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in the flight path Airspace information appears on this page based on the same criteria used for airspace alert messages If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the message Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes appears If the aircraft is within 2 nm of an airspace and the current course will take it inside of the airspace the message Ai
334. tions exists the message annunciator flashes alerting the pilot of an airspace message Viewing an airspace alert message 1 When the message annunciator above the MSG Key flashes press the MSG Key 2 Press the MSG Key again to return to the previous page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 8 12 SECTION 8 NRST PAGES Once an airspace alert message appears detailed information concerning the specific airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page Figure 8 24 The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name status Ahead Ahead lt 2nm etc as described on the preceding page and a time to entry if applicable By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest Airspace Page additional details are provided including controlling agency communication frequencies and floor ceiling limits Figure 8 24 Nearest Airspace Page Number of Pages in Current Page Group Position of Current Page within Current Page Group Current Page Group Message Annunciator Status and Time to Entry Airspace Name Viewing additional details for an airspace listed on the Nearest Airspace Page 1 Select the Nearest Airspace Page using the steps outlined in Section 8 1 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired airspace 4 Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
335. titude longitude position 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter a name for the new waypoint Figure 7 37 and press the ENT Key The present position appears in the position field at the bottom of the page To create a waypoint at the present position turn the large right knob to highlight Create and skip to step 6 Figure 7 37 User Waypoint Name Field Selected 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the position field at the bottom of the page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 19 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the position coordinates for the new waypoint Figure 7 38 Figure 7 38 Present Position Field Selected 5 Press the ENT Key to accept the selected position 6 The cursor moves to Create Press the ENT Key to add the new waypoint to memory 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Creating a new user waypoint by referencing an existing waypoint 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter a name for the new waypoint and press the ENT Key 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field Figure 7 39 Figure 7 39 Reference Waypoint Field Highlighted
336. to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TERRAIN can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions Detailed alert modes are described later in this section Baro Corrected Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The most accurate baro corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual atmosphere conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude as read from the altimeter to differ from the GPS MSL altitude This variation results in the aircraft s true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude Using TERRAIN During power up the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot At the same time TERRAIN self test begins A test failure is annunciated for TERRAIN as shown in Table 12 4 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 3 SECTION 12 TERRAIN 12 2 TERRAIN PAGE See Section 3 5 for a complete description of the TERRAIN Page and its operation TERRAIN Symbols The symbols and colors in Figure 12 1 and Table 12 1 are used to represent o
337. turn to reduce TKE to zero TRK track The direction of movement relative to a ground position Also referred to as ground track VSR vertical speed required The vertical speed necessary to descend climb from current position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude based upon the current ground speed XTK crosstrack error The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction left or right GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 16 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS 16 14 Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE A 1 APPENDIX A DATA CARD USE The Jeppesen NavData card and the Terrain Data Card if applicable supplied with the GNS 530 can be installed or removed when the GNS 530 is on or off If the NavData card is not present when the unit is turned on a No Jeppesen Aviation Database Limited to user defined waypoints message appears on the Database Confirmation Page If the NavData card is removed during operation a Data card removed Unit will restart in 30 seconds warning is displayed A counter begins to count down and if the card is not replaced within 30 seconds the GNS 530 automatically re initializes Pressing the ENT Key will manually re initialize the unit Figure A 1 Data Card Slot Locations Terrain Data Card Slot right hand slot
338. uct or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY Online Auction Purchases Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification To obtain warranty service an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction International Purchases A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country If applicable this warranty is provided by the local in country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom the United States Canada or Taiwan for service To obtain warranty service contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in locating a Service Center near you visit the Garmin Website at http www garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800 800 1020 GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H viii WARRANTY Blank Page GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Referenc
339. ure 7 43 The reference waypoint can be an airport VOR NDB intersection or another user waypoint Press the ENT Key to accept the selected identifier Figure 7 43 Ref Waypoint Field Selected 5 The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Use the small and large right knobs to change the radial from the reference waypoint if desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selected radial GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 7 22 SECTION 7 WPT PAGES 6 The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Use the small and large right knobs to change the distance from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint if desired Press the ENT Key to accept the selected distance 7 The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press the ENT Key to modify the waypoint 8 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE If the pilot attempts to modify or delete a waypoint which is currently a direct to waypoint or the current from or to waypoint in the active flight plan the GNS 530 alerts the pilot with the Can t change an active waypoint or Waypoint is active and can t be deleted message The pilot must first cancel the direct to or remove the waypoint s from the active flight plan before modifying or deleting the waypoint s User Waypoint Page Options The following User Waypoint Page options are available by pressing the MENU Key View User Way
340. uring installation The following TIS audio alerts are available Traffic TIS traffic alert is received Traffic Not Available TIS service is not available or out of range TIS Symbology TIS traffic is displayed on the GNS 530 unit according to TCAS symbology on a dedicated Traffic page and on the moving Map Page The symbology is shown in Table 14 1 and Figures 14 2 14 3 and 14 4 The symbology is described in Table 14 2 A Traffic Advisory TA symbol appears as a solid yellow circle or half circle on the outer range ring if the traffic is outside the range of the dedicated Traffic Page Other Traffic is displayed as hollow white may be configured as cyan diamonds Altitude deviation from own client aircraft altitude is displayed in hundreds of feet for each target symbol If traffic is above own aircraft altitude the deviation is shown above the target next to a symbol If traffic is below own aircraft altitude the deviation is shown below the target next to a symbol Altitude trend is displayed as an up arrow gt 500 fpm down arrow lt 500 fpm or no symbol if less than 500 fpm rate in either direction The traffic ground track vector protrudes from each symbol in the direction of travel Traffic Type Symbol Traffic Advisory Out of Range Traffic Advisory Other Traffic Table 14 1 TIS Symbology Figure 14 2 Traffic Page Own Client Airc
341. using a flight plan the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from the waypoints contained in the flight plan By default the last waypoint in the flight plan is selected To select a different waypoint turn the small right knob to select the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key 8 The default profile utilizes a 400 foot per minute descent rate To change the rate turn the large right knob to highlight the VS Profile field and use the small and large right knobs to enter a new rate Press the ENT Key when finished GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H SECTION 11 VERTICAL NAVIGATION 11 3 With the profile set the vertical speed required VSR is displayed on the Vertical Navigation Page Expect the following to occur when using the vertical navigation feature At one minute prior to reaching the initial descent point a message Approaching VNAV Profile Figure 11 5 occurs The descent or climb angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile Figure 11 5 VNAV Profile Message If selected the vertical speed required VSR readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent or climb angle At 500 feet above or below for a climb the target altitude an Approaching Target Altitude message is provided Figure 11 6 The VSR readout on the Default NAV and Map Pages
342. utozoom feature is available which automatically adjusts from an enroute range of 2000 nm through each lower range stopping at a range of 1 0 nm when approaching the destination waypoint The autozoom feature is turned on off from the Map Setup Page described in Section 3 4 The Map Page also displays a background map or basemap showing lakes rivers coastlines highways railways and towns When a map range is selected below the lower limit at which the map detail was originally created an overzoom indication appears on the Map Display below the range reading Figure 3 10 The basemap has limited accuracy and should not be used for navigation but only for non navigational situational awareness Any basemap indication should be compared against other navigational sources for accuracy Continuing to zoom in to lower range settings will cause overzoom to be replaced with no map and the geographic detail will be removed from the Map Display airport and NAVAID remain Figure 3 10 Overzoom on Map Page The Setup Map option described in Section 3 4 allows the pilot to define the maximum range at which each map feature appears This provides the pilot with complete control to minimize screen clutter The pilot can also quickly remove items from the map using the CLR Key Quickly decluttering the Map Display Press the CLR Key momentarily as often as needed to select the desired amount of map
343. ware algorithms TERRAIN alerts typically employ either an ADVISORY or a CAUTION alert severity level or both When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed Annunciations appear in a dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display Figure 12 2 Annunciations are color coded according to Table 12 2 Figure 12 2 TERRAIN Annunciation Field TERRAIN Annunciation Field NOTE TERRAIN Advisory Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a yellow background TERRAIN Caution Alerts are displayed as flashing black text on a yellow background Pop up terrain alerts Figures 12 3 amp 12 4 can also appear during an alert but only when the TERRAIN Page is not displayed There are two options when an alert is displayed Press the CLR Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and returns to the currently viewed page Press the ENT Key This acknowledges the pop up alert and accesses the TERRAIN Page Figure 12 3 TERRAIN Advisory Pop up Figure 12 4 TERRAIN Caution Pop up Flashing GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 12 5 SECTION 12 TERRAIN Table 12 2 shows the possible TERRAIN alert types with corresponding annunciations Alert Type Annunciation Pop Up Alert TERRAIN Failure None TERRAIN Inhibited None TERRAIN Not Available None Required Terrain Clearance RTC Advisory Required Terrain Clearance RTC Caution FLASHING FLASHING I
344. y Mode The GTS 8XX has four altitude display modes Figure 14 23 Normal 2 700 ft Above 2 700 ft to 9 000 ft Below 9 000 ft to 2 700 ft and Unrestricted 9 900 ft The GTS 8XX continues to display up to 30 intruder aircraft within its maximum surveillance range regardless of the altitude display mode selected The selected altitude display mode Figure 14 24 is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the Traffic Page Changing the Altitude Display Mode 1 From the Traffic Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor and highlight the current mode Figure 14 24 2 Turn the small right knob to cycle through the options The screen changes to display the traffic detected within the selected altitude display range Refer to Figure 14 23 for information regarding altitude display ranges Figure 14 23 Altitude Display Modes 2 700 ft Drawing Not to Scale Normal NRM Below BLW 2 700 ft 9 900 ft Above ABV 0 ft 9 900 ft Unrestricted UNR 0 ft 2 700 ft 9 000 ft 9 000 ft NOTE Confirmation is not required the mode is changed immediately when using the small right knob Figure 14 24 UNR Selected Altitude Display Mode 3 Press the small right knob to turn the cursor off after the selection is made GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 14 17 SECTION 14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Traffic Warning Window Whe
345. ypoint named MAP is automatically created at the location of the panning pointer Selecting a direct to destination from the Map Page 1 From the Map Page press the small right knob to display a panning pointer 2 Turn the small and large right knobs to place the panning pointer at the desired destination location 3 If the panning pointer is placed on an existing airport NAVAID or user waypoint the waypoint name is highlighted Figure 4 12 Press the Direct to Key and the ENT Key twice to navigate to the waypoint Figure 4 12 Panning Pointer Placed on Waypoint 4 If the panning pointer is placed on an open location press the Direct to Key then press the ENT Key twice to create a MAP waypoint and navigate to it GNS 530 A Pilot s Guide and Reference 190 00181 00 Rev H 4 6 SECTION 4 DIRECT TO NAVIGATION Cancelling Direct to Navigation Once a direct to is activated the GNS 530 provides navigation guidance to the selected destination until the direct to is replaced with a new direct to or flight plan cancelled or the unit is turned off Cancelling a direct to 1 Press the Direct to Key to display the Select Direct to Waypoint Page 2 Press the MENU Key to display the Direct to Page Menu Figure 4 13 Figure 4 13 Select Direct to Page Menu 3 With Cancel Direct to NAV highlighted press the ENT Key If a flight plan is still active the GNS 530 resumes navigating

Garmin 360 GPS Receiver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents